<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="fr">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Melrom</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - Contributions [fr]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Melrom"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/Sp%C3%A9cial:Contributions/Melrom"/>
	<updated>2026-05-26T22:36:06Z</updated>
	<subtitle>Contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=R%C3%A9f%C3%A9rentiels_de_comp%C3%A9tences&amp;diff=8633</id>
		<title>Référentiels de compétences</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=R%C3%A9f%C3%A9rentiels_de_comp%C3%A9tences&amp;diff=8633"/>
		<updated>2016-05-27T19:34:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Configurer un Référentiel de compétences */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Compétences}}{{Moodle 3.1}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Configurer un Référentiel de compétences ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les utilisateurs ayant le rôle d&#039;administrateur au niveau du site et ceux qui disposent de la capacité de gérer les référentiels de compétence (moodle/competency:competencymanage) au niveau du site ou d&#039;une catégorie peuvent créer de nouveaux référentiels ainsi que les compétences qui leur sont associées.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Aller à  &#039;&#039;Administration du site &amp;gt; Compétences &amp;gt; Référentiels de compétences &#039;&#039; pour créer un ensemble de compétences au niveau du site ;  pour créer un ensemble de compétences depuis une catégorie suivez le même type de lien à partir du bloc Administration de la catégorie.&lt;br /&gt;
*Tous les référentiels disponibles sont affichés sur cette page ; cliquer le boutons &amp;quot;Ajouter un référentiel de compétences&amp;quot; pour en créer un nouveau :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_competencyframework.png|thumb|1024px|center|Cliquer le bouton pour ajouter un référentiel]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Le  &#039;&#039;&#039;numéro d&#039;identification&#039;&#039;&#039; (qui peut être constitué de toute chaîne de caractère) doit être choisi avec soin, afin d&#039;éviter les ambiguïtés, surtout s&#039;il est souhaitable de proposer simultanément différentes versions du même référentiel de compétences sur le site (par exemple différentes révisons annuelles). &lt;br /&gt;
*Le &#039;&#039;&#039;Barème&#039;&#039;&#039; associé au référentiel est celui qui sera attribué par défaut aux compétences pour leur évaluation. Cependant un compétence peut avoir son propre barème dans le référentiel.&lt;br /&gt;
*Cliquer &#039;&#039;&#039;Configurer le barème&#039;&#039;&#039; affiche des informations supplémentaires sur la gestion de l&#039;évaluation. Ainsi pour chaque barème il doit y avoir une valeur par défaut, laquelle sera assignée quand une compétences est validée par une règle automatique et il faut aussi indiquer quelles valeurs du barème permettent de &#039;&#039;&#039;valider&#039;&#039;&#039;la compétence ; cela permet aux étudiants de vérifier d&#039;un coup d&#039;oeil quelles compétences sont acquises et quelles ne le sont pas..&lt;br /&gt;
*La fenêtre déroulante des &#039;&#039;&#039;Taxinomies&#039;&#039;&#039; vous pouvez définir les étiquettes dénommant les compétences pour ce référentiel, en fonction de leur profondeur dans l&#039;arbre des compétences.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une fois le référentiel de compétences créé celui-ci apparaît dans la liste des référentiels et vous pouvez passer à l&#039;attribution de compétences. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N.B. : &lt;br /&gt;
*Les référentiels de compétences peuvent aussi être importés en utilisant des plugins spécialisés. Consultez la liste des plugins dans la base d e données des plugins pour plus d&#039;information.&lt;br /&gt;
*Le module Référentiel développé par J. Fruitet pour Moodle 3.1 dispose d&#039;un outil d&#039;exportation vers les référentiels de compétences de Moodle. [[https://github.com/jfruitet/moodle_referentiel]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ajouter des compétences à un référentiel===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour ajouter des compétences à un référentiel cliquer sur le nom du référentiel. Vous accédez à la page de gestion des compétences pour ce référentiel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_managing competencies.png|frame|center|Gestion des compétences pour le C2i2e 2011]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette page vous permet de construire l&#039;arbre des compétences qui constituent votre référentiel de compétences. Pour commencer l&#039;ajout de compétences commencez par cliquer sur le noeud de l&#039;arbre où procéder à l&#039;insertion d&#039;une nouvelle compétence (le premier nœud - la racine - de l&#039;arbre est le référentiel lui-même), puis cliquez le bouton &#039;&#039;Ajouter une compétence&#039;&#039;. (Si le nom de l&#039;étiquette est différent dans votre taxinomie le bouton s&#039;adapte, par exemple &amp;quot;Ajouter une habileté&amp;quot;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Le &#039;&#039;&#039;numéro d&#039;identification&#039;&#039;&#039; [&#039;&#039;ID number&#039;&#039;] est requis et doit être unique pour ce référentiel de compétence. Il est utilisé pour associer les compétences lors des procédure de sauvegarde et de restauration ainsi que lors des migrations vers de nouvelles versions de référentiels.&lt;br /&gt;
*Le &#039;&#039;&#039;Barème&#039;&#039;&#039; et les items de la fenêtre de &#039;&#039;Configuration du barème&#039;&#039;  seront hérités par défaut du barème associé au référentiel ; toutefois vous pouvez définir un barème personnalisé pour chaque compétence si nécessaire.&lt;br /&gt;
*Une fois la compétence créée, cliquer &amp;quot;&#039;Modifier&#039;&amp;quot; en regard de la compétence sélectionnée affiche d&#039;autres options, permettant par exemple d&#039;indiquer que la compétence est &#039;&#039;associée&#039;&#039; à d&#039;autres compétences ; vous pouvez aussi créer des règles automatiques de validation. Une règle automatique de validation (une&#039;&#039;Règle de compétence&#039;&#039;) permet de valider une compétence dont toutes les sous-compétences sont validées.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_relatedcompetency.png|thumb|1024px|center|Options supplémentaires pour un compétence sélectionnée]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Configurer une règle de compétence===&lt;br /&gt;
*Une compétence peut être marquée comme acquise (être &#039;&#039;validée&#039;&#039;) quand ses sous-compétences sont validées ou qu&#039;elles totalisent un certain seuil en terme de points.&lt;br /&gt;
*Pour ce faire cliquer Modifier en regard de la compétence et sélectionner &#039;&#039;Règle de compétence&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Cliquer dans la boîte en regard du champ &#039;&#039;&#039;Objectif&#039;&#039;&#039; (zone &#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039; ci-dessous)  et choisir &amp;quot;Marquer comme acquis&amp;quot;  (zone &#039;&#039;2&#039;&#039; ci-dessous.)&lt;br /&gt;
*La rubrique &#039;Quand&#039; permet de sélectionner &#039;Toutes les compétences filles sont atteintes&#039; ou &#039;Le nombre de points requis est atteint&#039;. Pour &#039;Le nombre de points requis est atteint&#039; vous pouvez positionner les points et désigner les sous-compétences requises pour que la compétence mère soit validée :&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_competencyrulec.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Voir aussi==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Plans de formation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Bloc plans de formation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Rapport de compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ des compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Competency frameworks]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Armazones de competencia]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Plans_de_formation&amp;diff=8632</id>
		<title>Plans de formation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Plans_de_formation&amp;diff=8632"/>
		<updated>2016-05-27T19:33:23Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Preuves d&amp;#039;acquis */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Compétences}}{{Moodle 3.1}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Créer un modèle de Plan de formation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Une fois qu&#039;un ou plusieurs [[Référentiels de compétences|référentiels de compétences]] ont été créés et configurés sur votre plateforme, vous pouvez mettre en place des &#039;&#039;modèles de [[Plans de formation|plans de formation]]&#039;&#039;. Un modèle de plan de formation définit un ensemble de [[Compétences|compétences]] qui peuvent être attribuées à une cohorte d&#039;utilisateurs. C&#039;est une meilleure pratique que de créer des plans de formations individuels pour différents étudiants ; il suffira de mettre à jour le modèle pour que les modifications soient répercutées pour chacun des étudiants associés à ce plan de formation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Aller à &#039;&#039;Administration du site &amp;gt; Plans de formation.&#039;&#039; Tout plan existant est affiché sur la page ; cliquer le bouton &#039;&#039;Ajouter un modèle de plan de formation&#039;&#039; pour en créer un nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_learning-plan.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ajout de compétences à un modèle de plan de formation===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour ajouter des [[Compétences|compétences]] à un modèle de [[Plans de formation|plans de formation]], cliquer le nom du modèle ; la page qui s&#039;affiche permet d&#039;associer, modifier et supprimer des compétences. Elle affiche aussi la liste des compétences qui ne sont reliées à aucun cours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une fois les compétences ajoutées au modèle, passez à l&#039;association du modèle, soit individuellement à des étudiants, soit à des cohortes entières.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Attribuer des plans de formation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Les [[Plans de formation|plans de formation]] peuvent être attribués aussi bien individuellement que de façon massive à des cohortes pré-existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Une fois le modèle enregistré cliquer sur l&#039;icône &#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pour attribuer un plan de formation à une cohorte&#039;&#039;&#039; cliquer &#039;&#039;Ajouts des cohortes à synchroniser&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_cohortlp1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_cohortlp2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Sélectionnez la (les) cohorte(s) concernée(s)&lt;br /&gt;
*Un message affiche le nombre de plans de formation créés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Pour attribuer individuellement un plan de formation à un utilisateur particulier, cliquer &#039;&#039;Créer un plan de formation&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_userlp1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Utilisez le champ de recherche pour sélectionner les étudiants auxquels attribuer ce plan de formation :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_userlp2.png|Évitez de sélectionner des utilisateurs déjà associés à ce plan de formation !]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_userlp4.png|Liste des utilisateurs associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Afficher ses plans de formation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tout utilisateur peut lister les plans de formation auxquels il a souscrit en passant par le menu de la page du profil utilisateur :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentlearningplanaccess1.png|thumb|800px|center|Ouvrir le profil]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentlearningplanaccess2.png|thumb|800px|center|Sélectionner le lien vers la page de plans de formation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Affichage des plans de formation auxquels il est inscrit :&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentlearningplanaccess3.png|thumb|800px|center|Cliquer sur un plan pour y accéder]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_student2.png|thumb|800px|center|Vue étudiant d&#039;avancement d&#039;un plan]]&lt;br /&gt;
Quand un utilisateur clique sur le nom d&#039;un des plans de formation qui lui sont attribués, il voit la liste des compétences associées. La barre de progression lui indique où il en est et en cliquant sur &#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039; il peut émettre une requête pour évaluation de l&#039;une ou l&#039;autre des compétences :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentlp.png|thumb|800px|center|Demande d&#039;évaluation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Capacités associées aux Plans de formation ===&lt;br /&gt;
*Les utilisateurs (par exemple les &#039;superviseurs&#039;) ayant la capacité &#039;&#039;moodle/competency:planview&#039;&#039; dans le contexte&amp;quot;utilisateur&amp;quot; peuvent afficher les plans de formation d&#039;autres utilisateurs.&lt;br /&gt;
*Les utilisateurs ayant la capacité &#039;&#039;moodle/competency:planviewowndraft&#039;&#039; dans &amp;quot;leur propre contexte utilisateur&amp;quot; ont la possibilité de se créer un &#039;&#039;plan de formation personnel en mode brouillon&#039;&#039; pour eux-mêmes. Les plans de formation en mode brouillon ne sont visibles que par les utilisateurs ayant la capacité &#039;&#039;moodle/competency:planviewdraft&#039;&#039; - et peuvent être envoyés pour approbation avant d&#039;être transformés en modèle actif de plan de formation système.&lt;br /&gt;
*Les utilisateurs ayant la capacité &#039;&#039;moodle/competency:planmanagedraft&#039;&#039; peuvent approuver un plan de formation en mode brouillon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preuves d&#039;acquis ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tout utilisateur avec la capacité &#039;&#039;moodle/competency:userevidencemanageown&#039;&#039; peut fournir une liste de preuves d&#039;acquis à propos des compétences qu&#039;il sollicite. Cela peut servir à faire la démonstration de sa propre pratique et par conséquent l&#039;acquisition d&#039;une ou plusieurs compétences...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déposer une preuve d&#039;acquis il faut commencer par accéder à la liste de ses plans de formation (en passant par votre profil) et cliquer le lien &#039;&#039;Preuve d&#039;acquis&#039;&#039; (1) &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_priorlearning2.png|thumb|800px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sur la page suivante cliquer sur le bouton &amp;quot;Ajouter une preuve d&#039;acquis&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentproof.png|thumb|800px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez déposer un document ou citer un lien Internet pour fournir autant de détails que nécessaire et apporter la preuve de vos compétences. Une fois ces preuves listées vous pouvez leur lier une ou plusieurs compétences tirées de l&#039;un de vos plans de formation. Puis vous pouvez envoyer une &#039;&#039;requête pour évaluation&#039;&#039; afin qu&#039;un référent puisse évaluer vos arguments et décider de vous accorder ou pas la compétence.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentproof2.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Voir aussi==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Référentiels de compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Bloc plans de formation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Bloc des compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Rapport de compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ des compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Learning plans]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Planes de aprendizaje]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Plans_de_formation&amp;diff=8631</id>
		<title>Plans de formation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Plans_de_formation&amp;diff=8631"/>
		<updated>2016-05-27T19:32:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Capacités associées aux Plans de formation */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Compétences}}{{Moodle 3.1}}&lt;br /&gt;
== Créer un modèle de Plan de formation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Une fois qu&#039;un ou plusieurs [[Référentiels de compétences|référentiels de compétences]] ont été créés et configurés sur votre plateforme, vous pouvez mettre en place des &#039;&#039;modèles de [[Plans de formation|plans de formation]]&#039;&#039;. Un modèle de plan de formation définit un ensemble de [[Compétences|compétences]] qui peuvent être attribuées à une cohorte d&#039;utilisateurs. C&#039;est une meilleure pratique que de créer des plans de formations individuels pour différents étudiants ; il suffira de mettre à jour le modèle pour que les modifications soient répercutées pour chacun des étudiants associés à ce plan de formation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Aller à &#039;&#039;Administration du site &amp;gt; Plans de formation.&#039;&#039; Tout plan existant est affiché sur la page ; cliquer le bouton &#039;&#039;Ajouter un modèle de plan de formation&#039;&#039; pour en créer un nouveau.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_learning-plan.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Ajout de compétences à un modèle de plan de formation===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour ajouter des [[Compétences|compétences]] à un modèle de [[Plans de formation|plans de formation]], cliquer le nom du modèle ; la page qui s&#039;affiche permet d&#039;associer, modifier et supprimer des compétences. Elle affiche aussi la liste des compétences qui ne sont reliées à aucun cours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une fois les compétences ajoutées au modèle, passez à l&#039;association du modèle, soit individuellement à des étudiants, soit à des cohortes entières.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Attribuer des plans de formation==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Les [[Plans de formation|plans de formation]] peuvent être attribués aussi bien individuellement que de façon massive à des cohortes pré-existantes.&lt;br /&gt;
*Une fois le modèle enregistré cliquer sur l&#039;icône &#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Pour attribuer un plan de formation à une cohorte&#039;&#039;&#039; cliquer &#039;&#039;Ajouts des cohortes à synchroniser&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_cohortlp1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_cohortlp2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Sélectionnez la (les) cohorte(s) concernée(s)&lt;br /&gt;
*Un message affiche le nombre de plans de formation créés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Pour attribuer individuellement un plan de formation à un utilisateur particulier, cliquer &#039;&#039;Créer un plan de formation&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_userlp1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Utilisez le champ de recherche pour sélectionner les étudiants auxquels attribuer ce plan de formation :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_userlp2.png|Évitez de sélectionner des utilisateurs déjà associés à ce plan de formation !]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_userlp4.png|Liste des utilisateurs associés]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Afficher ses plans de formation ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tout utilisateur peut lister les plans de formation auxquels il a souscrit en passant par le menu de la page du profil utilisateur :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentlearningplanaccess1.png|thumb|800px|center|Ouvrir le profil]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentlearningplanaccess2.png|thumb|800px|center|Sélectionner le lien vers la page de plans de formation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Affichage des plans de formation auxquels il est inscrit :&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentlearningplanaccess3.png|thumb|800px|center|Cliquer sur un plan pour y accéder]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_student2.png|thumb|800px|center|Vue étudiant d&#039;avancement d&#039;un plan]]&lt;br /&gt;
Quand un utilisateur clique sur le nom d&#039;un des plans de formation qui lui sont attribués, il voit la liste des compétences associées. La barre de progression lui indique où il en est et en cliquant sur &#039;&#039;Modifier&#039;&#039; il peut émettre une requête pour évaluation de l&#039;une ou l&#039;autre des compétences :&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentlp.png|thumb|800px|center|Demande d&#039;évaluation]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Capacités associées aux Plans de formation ===&lt;br /&gt;
*Les utilisateurs (par exemple les &#039;superviseurs&#039;) ayant la capacité &#039;&#039;moodle/competency:planview&#039;&#039; dans le contexte&amp;quot;utilisateur&amp;quot; peuvent afficher les plans de formation d&#039;autres utilisateurs.&lt;br /&gt;
*Les utilisateurs ayant la capacité &#039;&#039;moodle/competency:planviewowndraft&#039;&#039; dans &amp;quot;leur propre contexte utilisateur&amp;quot; ont la possibilité de se créer un &#039;&#039;plan de formation personnel en mode brouillon&#039;&#039; pour eux-mêmes. Les plans de formation en mode brouillon ne sont visibles que par les utilisateurs ayant la capacité &#039;&#039;moodle/competency:planviewdraft&#039;&#039; - et peuvent être envoyés pour approbation avant d&#039;être transformés en modèle actif de plan de formation système.&lt;br /&gt;
*Les utilisateurs ayant la capacité &#039;&#039;moodle/competency:planmanagedraft&#039;&#039; peuvent approuver un plan de formation en mode brouillon.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Preuves d&#039;acquis ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tout utilisateur avec la capacité &#039;&#039;tool/lp:userevidencemanageown&#039;&#039; peut fournir une liste de preuves d&#039;acquis à propos des compétences qu&#039;il sollicite. Cela peut servir à faire la démonstration de sa propre pratique et par conséquent l&#039;acquisition d&#039;une ou plusieurs compétences...&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déposer une preuve d&#039;acquis il faut commencer par accéder à la liste de ses plans de formation (en passant par votre profil) et cliquer le lien &#039;&#039;Preuve d&#039;acquis&#039;&#039; (1) &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_priorlearning2.png|thumb|800px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sur la page suivante cliquer sur le bouton &amp;quot;Ajouter une preuve d&#039;acquis&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentproof.png|thumb|800px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez déposer un document ou citer un lien Internet pour fournir autant de détails que nécessaire et apporter la preuve de vos compétences. Une fois ces preuves listées vous pouvez leur lier une ou plusieurs compétences tirées de l&#039;un de vos plans de formation. Puis vous pouvez envoyer une &#039;&#039;requête pour évaluation&#039;&#039; afin qu&#039;un référent puisse évaluer vos arguments et décider de vous accorder ou pas la compétence.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:fr_studentproof2.png|thumb|600px|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Voir aussi==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Référentiels de compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Bloc plans de formation]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Bloc des compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Rapport de compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[FAQ des compétences]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Learning plans]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Planes de aprendizaje]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Surveillance_d%27%C3%A9v%C3%A9nements&amp;diff=5530</id>
		<title>Surveillance d&#039;événements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Surveillance_d%27%C3%A9v%C3%A9nements&amp;diff=5530"/>
		<updated>2015-07-15T20:37:47Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Rapports de site}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is Event monitoring?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Event monitoring allows admins and teachers to receive notification when certain events happen in Moodle. See [[Events list]] for examples of events and their levels. Note that students may also be allowed to subscribe to rules if they are given the capability &#039;&#039;tool/monitor:subscribe&#039;&#039;. It is not recommended that they be allowed to create or manage rules.&lt;br /&gt;
*To do this, a &#039;rule&#039; needs to be created for the event to be monitored and then a user, such as the admin or teacher will need to subscribe to it to be notified.&lt;br /&gt;
*The rule will specify what the event is and how often it must happen before notification is sent to the subscriber. The notification may be pop-up, email or other chosen methods.&lt;br /&gt;
*A teacher can create a rule from &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039; and an administrator can, additionally, create a rule from &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*You can subscribe to available rules from &#039;&#039;My profile settings&amp;gt;Event monitoring&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;http://youtu.be/YkuK2w1lJnk&amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling Event monitoring==&lt;br /&gt;
Event monitoring is disabled by default because of performance issues. An administrator can enable it from &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to create or manage  a rule==&lt;br /&gt;
As a course teacher, go to &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039;, or as an admin go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule name===&lt;br /&gt;
You can call the rule what you like but it should be something others will understand as they may wish  to subscribe to the rule you created.&lt;br /&gt;
===Area to monitor===&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an area to monitor, for example, &#039;&#039;Forum&#039;&#039;, the &#039;Event&#039; drop down menu below will then display the events you can select from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Event===&lt;br /&gt;
Once an area has been chosen, the events for that area will display here.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
You don&#039;t have to use a description but if you do, it should be something meaningful to others as they may wish to subscribe to the rule you created.&lt;br /&gt;
===Notification threshold===&lt;br /&gt;
*This means: &#039;&#039;how many times should this event happen before I get notified?&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*For example the following setting would mean that if an event happens five times in 30 minutes then Moodle will send you an alert:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:notificationthreshold.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Notification message===&lt;br /&gt;
When creating or editing a rule, you can embed placeholders to add details to notification messages. The use of placeholders is optional; you can use any personalised message, but if you wish to use placeholders, there are examples of use below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The placeholders that can be used in a message template are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Placeholder&lt;br /&gt;
! What it does&lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Direct link to the actual event, eg a forum discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
| http://YourMoodle.com/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{modulelink}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Link to the module where the event has happened, eg a forum&lt;br /&gt;
| http://YourMoodle.com/mod/forum/view.php?id=8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{rulename}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| A name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
| Student discussions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{description}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| A description of the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
| I want to receive notifications when there is a large volume of student posts in a discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{eventname}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The name of the event being monitored.&lt;br /&gt;
| Forum post created.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example 1====&lt;br /&gt;
The above example shows the placeholders for a rule to monitor the &#039;&#039;&#039;Forum post created&#039;&#039;&#039; event. The  notification message using these placeholders would  be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule &#039;&#039;&#039;{rulename}&#039;&#039;&#039;, monitoring the event &#039;&#039;&#039;{eventname}&#039;&#039;&#039;, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click the following link to go to the forum discussion: &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: &#039;&#039;&#039;{description}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result would display like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule Student discussions, monitoring the event Forum post created, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click on the following link to go to the forum discussion: http://YourMoodle.com/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2 .&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: I want to receive notifications when there are a large volume of student posts in a discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
====Example 2====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s create a rule called &#039;&#039;&#039;Glossary entries&#039;&#039;&#039; to monitor when a new glossary entry is created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule &#039;&#039;&#039;{rulename}&#039;&#039;&#039;, monitoring the event &#039;&#039;&#039;{eventname}&#039;&#039;&#039;, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click the following link to go to see the new entry created: &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: &#039;&#039;&#039;{description}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result would display like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule Glossary entries, monitoring the event Entry has been created, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click on the following link to go to see the new entry created: http://YourMoodle.com/mod/glossary/view.php?id=5&amp;amp;mode=entry&amp;amp;hook=1.&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: I want to receive notifications when a new glossary entry is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Some events do not have a link.  &#039;&#039;&#039;Course deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Course module deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; for example, would not display any link if &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;  or &#039;&#039;&#039;{modulelink}&#039;&#039;&#039; is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to subscribe to a rule==&lt;br /&gt;
*When events are created from &#039;&#039;Site&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039; ,there is a link to the Event monitoring page which is in  &#039;&#039;My profile settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*From here, you can unsubscribe to  any events you are subscribed to already and you can subscribe to new events created by you or others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EMSubscriptions.png|thumb|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Events list report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Monitoreo de eventos]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Event-Beobachtung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Surveillance_d%27%C3%A9v%C3%A9nements&amp;diff=5529</id>
		<title>Surveillance d&#039;événements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Surveillance_d%27%C3%A9v%C3%A9nements&amp;diff=5529"/>
		<updated>2015-07-15T20:35:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Rapports de site}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
==What is Event monitoring?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Event monitoring allows admins and teachers to receive notification when certain events happen in Moodle. See [[Events list]] for examples of events and their levels. Note that students may also be allowed to subscribe to rules if they are given the capability &#039;&#039;tool/monitor:subscribe&#039;&#039;. It is not recommended that they be allowed to create or manage rules.&lt;br /&gt;
*To do this, a &#039;rule&#039; needs to be created for the event to be monitored and then a user, such as the admin or teacher will need to subscribe to it to be notified.&lt;br /&gt;
*The rule will specify what the event is and how often it must happen before notification is sent to the subscriber. The notification may be pop-up, email or other chosen methods.&lt;br /&gt;
*A teacher can create a rule from &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039; and an administrator can, additionally, create a rule from &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*You can subscribe to available rules from &#039;&#039;My profile settings&amp;gt;Event monitoring&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;http://youtu.be/YkuK2w1lJnk&amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling Event monitoring==&lt;br /&gt;
Event monitoring is disabled by default because of performance issues. An administrator can enable it from &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to create or manage  a rule==&lt;br /&gt;
As a course teacher, go to &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039;, or as an admin go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule name===&lt;br /&gt;
You can call the rule what you like but it should be something others will understand as they may wish  to subscribe to the rule you created.&lt;br /&gt;
===Area to monitor===&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an area to monitor, for example, &#039;&#039;Forum&#039;&#039;, the &#039;Event&#039; drop down menu below will then display the events you can select from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Event===&lt;br /&gt;
Once an area has been chosen, the events for that area will display here.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
You don&#039;t have to use a description but if you do, it should be something meaningful to others as they may wish to subscribe to the rule you created.&lt;br /&gt;
===Notification threshold===&lt;br /&gt;
*This means: &#039;&#039;how many times should this event happen before I get notified?&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*For example the following setting would mean that if an event happens five times in 30 minutes then Moodle will send you an alert:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:notificationthreshold.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Notification message===&lt;br /&gt;
When creating or editing a rule, you can embed placeholders to add details to notification messages. The use of placeholders is optional; you can use any personalised message, but if you wish to use placeholders, there are examples of use below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The placeholders that can be used in a message template are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Placeholder&lt;br /&gt;
! What it does&lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Direct link to the actual event, eg a forum discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
| http://YourMoodle.com/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{modulelink}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Link to the module where the event has happened, eg a forum&lt;br /&gt;
| http://YourMoodle.com/mod/forum/view.php?id=8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{rulename}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| A name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
| Student discussions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{description}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| A description of the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
| I want to receive notifications when there is a large volume of student posts in a discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{eventname}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The name of the event being monitored.&lt;br /&gt;
| Forum post created.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example 1====&lt;br /&gt;
The above example shows the placeholders for a rule to monitor the &#039;&#039;&#039;Forum post created&#039;&#039;&#039; event. The  notification message using these placeholders would  be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule &#039;&#039;&#039;{rulename}&#039;&#039;&#039;, monitoring the event &#039;&#039;&#039;{eventname}&#039;&#039;&#039;, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click the following link to go to the forum discussion: &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: &#039;&#039;&#039;{description}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result would display like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule Student discussions, monitoring the event Forum post created, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click on the following link to go to the forum discussion: http://YourMoodle.com/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2 .&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: I want to receive notifications when there are a large volume of student posts in a discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
====Example 2====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s create a rule called &#039;&#039;&#039;Glossary entries&#039;&#039;&#039; to monitor when a new glossary entry is created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule &#039;&#039;&#039;{rulename}&#039;&#039;&#039;, monitoring the event &#039;&#039;&#039;{eventname}&#039;&#039;&#039;, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click the following link to go to see the new entry created: &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: &#039;&#039;&#039;{description}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result would display like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule Glossary entries, monitoring the event Entry has been created, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click on the following link to go to see the new entry created: http://YourMoodle.com/mod/glossary/view.php?id=5&amp;amp;mode=entry&amp;amp;hook=1.&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: I want to receive notifications when a new glossary entry is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Some events do not have a link.  &#039;&#039;&#039;Course deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Course module deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; for example, would not display any link if &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;  or &#039;&#039;&#039;{modulelink}&#039;&#039;&#039; is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to subscribe to a rule==&lt;br /&gt;
*When events are created from &#039;&#039;Site&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039; ,there is a link to the Event monitoring page which is in  &#039;&#039;My profile settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*From here, you can unsubscribe to  any events you are subscribed to already and you can subscribe to new events created by you or others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EMSubscriptions.png|thumb|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Events list report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Monitoreo de eventos]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Event-Beobachtung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Rapports_de_site&amp;diff=5528</id>
		<title>Rapports de site</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Rapports_de_site&amp;diff=5528"/>
		<updated>2015-07-15T20:35:35Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Surveillance d&#039;événements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Rapports_de_site&amp;diff=5527</id>
		<title>Rapports de site</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Rapports_de_site&amp;diff=5527"/>
		<updated>2015-07-15T20:35:06Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page créée avec « {{Rapports de site}}  Surveillance d&amp;#039;événements »&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Rapports de site}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Surveillance d&#039;événements]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Surveillance_d%27%C3%A9v%C3%A9nements&amp;diff=5526</id>
		<title>Surveillance d&#039;événements</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Surveillance_d%27%C3%A9v%C3%A9nements&amp;diff=5526"/>
		<updated>2015-07-15T20:24:38Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page créée avec « {{Course reports}} {{New features}} ==What is Event monitoring?== *Event monitoring allows admins and teachers to receive notification when certain events happen in Moodle... »&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Course reports}}&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
==What is Event monitoring?==&lt;br /&gt;
*Event monitoring allows admins and teachers to receive notification when certain events happen in Moodle. See [[Events list]] for examples of events and their levels. Note that students may also be allowed to subscribe to rules if they are given the capability &#039;&#039;tool/monitor:subscribe&#039;&#039;. It is not recommended that they be allowed to create or manage rules.&lt;br /&gt;
*To do this, a &#039;rule&#039; needs to be created for the event to be monitored and then a user, such as the admin or teacher will need to subscribe to it to be notified.&lt;br /&gt;
*The rule will specify what the event is and how often it must happen before notification is sent to the subscriber. The notification may be pop-up, email or other chosen methods.&lt;br /&gt;
*A teacher can create a rule from &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039; and an administrator can, additionally, create a rule from &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*You can subscribe to available rules from &#039;&#039;My profile settings&amp;gt;Event monitoring&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;mediaplayer&amp;gt;http://youtu.be/YkuK2w1lJnk&amp;lt;/mediaplayer&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling Event monitoring==&lt;br /&gt;
Event monitoring is disabled by default because of performance issues. An administrator can enable it from &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to create or manage  a rule==&lt;br /&gt;
As a course teacher, go to &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039;, or as an admin go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Rule name===&lt;br /&gt;
You can call the rule what you like but it should be something others will understand as they may wish  to subscribe to the rule you created.&lt;br /&gt;
===Area to monitor===&lt;br /&gt;
When you select an area to monitor, for example, &#039;&#039;Forum&#039;&#039;, the &#039;Event&#039; drop down menu below will then display the events you can select from.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Event===&lt;br /&gt;
Once an area has been chosen, the events for that area will display here.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
You don&#039;t have to use a description but if you do, it should be something meaningful to others as they may wish to subscribe to the rule you created.&lt;br /&gt;
===Notification threshold===&lt;br /&gt;
*This means: &#039;&#039;how many times should this event happen before I get notified?&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
*For example the following setting would mean that if an event happens five times in 30 minutes then Moodle will send you an alert:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:notificationthreshold.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Notification message===&lt;br /&gt;
When creating or editing a rule, you can embed placeholders to add details to notification messages. The use of placeholders is optional; you can use any personalised message, but if you wish to use placeholders, there are examples of use below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The placeholders that can be used in a message template are as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
{| class=&amp;quot;nicetable&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
! Placeholder&lt;br /&gt;
! What it does&lt;br /&gt;
! Example&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Direct link to the actual event, eg a forum discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
| http://YourMoodle.com/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{modulelink}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| Link to the module where the event has happened, eg a forum&lt;br /&gt;
| http://YourMoodle.com/mod/forum/view.php?id=8&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{rulename}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| A name for the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
| Student discussions&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{description}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| A description of the rule.&lt;br /&gt;
| I want to receive notifications when there is a large volume of student posts in a discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| &#039;&#039;&#039;{eventname}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
| The name of the event being monitored.&lt;br /&gt;
| Forum post created.&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example 1====&lt;br /&gt;
The above example shows the placeholders for a rule to monitor the &#039;&#039;&#039;Forum post created&#039;&#039;&#039; event. The  notification message using these placeholders would  be as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule &#039;&#039;&#039;{rulename}&#039;&#039;&#039;, monitoring the event &#039;&#039;&#039;{eventname}&#039;&#039;&#039;, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click the following link to go to the forum discussion: &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: &#039;&#039;&#039;{description}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result would display like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule Student discussions, monitoring the event Forum post created, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click on the following link to go to the forum discussion: http://YourMoodle.com/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2 .&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: I want to receive notifications when there are a large volume of student posts in a discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
====Example 2====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s create a rule called &#039;&#039;&#039;Glossary entries&#039;&#039;&#039; to monitor when a new glossary entry is created:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule &#039;&#039;&#039;{rulename}&#039;&#039;&#039;, monitoring the event &#039;&#039;&#039;{eventname}&#039;&#039;&#039;, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click the following link to go to see the new entry created: &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: &#039;&#039;&#039;{description}&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The result would display like this:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 The rule Glossary entries, monitoring the event Entry has been created, has just been fulfilled. &lt;br /&gt;
 Click on the following link to go to see the new entry created: http://YourMoodle.com/mod/glossary/view.php?id=5&amp;amp;mode=entry&amp;amp;hook=1.&lt;br /&gt;
 Rule description: I want to receive notifications when a new glossary entry is created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; Some events do not have a link.  &#039;&#039;&#039;Course deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Course module deleted&#039;&#039;&#039; for example, would not display any link if &#039;&#039;&#039;{link}&#039;&#039;&#039;  or &#039;&#039;&#039;{modulelink}&#039;&#039;&#039; is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to subscribe to a rule==&lt;br /&gt;
*When events are created from &#039;&#039;Site&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Event monitoring rules&#039;&#039; ,there is a link to the Event monitoring page which is in  &#039;&#039;My profile settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*From here, you can unsubscribe to  any events you are subscribed to already and you can subscribe to new events created by you or others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:EMSubscriptions.png|thumb|center|500px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Events list report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Monitoreo de eventos]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Event-Beobachtung]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/view&amp;diff=3915</id>
		<title>mod/wiki/view</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/view&amp;diff=3915"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T21:53:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Afficher un wiki&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Afficher_un_wiki]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/files&amp;diff=3914</id>
		<title>mod/wiki/files</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/files&amp;diff=3914"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T21:52:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Afficher un wiki&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Afficher_un_wiki]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/map&amp;diff=3913</id>
		<title>mod/wiki/map</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/map&amp;diff=3913"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T21:51:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Afficher un wiki&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Afficher_un_wiki]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/history&amp;diff=3912</id>
		<title>mod/wiki/history</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/history&amp;diff=3912"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T21:51:18Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Afficher un wiki&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Afficher_un_wiki]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/comments&amp;diff=3911</id>
		<title>mod/wiki/comments</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/comments&amp;diff=3911"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T21:50:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Afficher un wiki&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Afficher_un_wiki]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/edit&amp;diff=3910</id>
		<title>mod/wiki/edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/edit&amp;diff=3910"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T21:48:07Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Ajouter/modifier un wiki&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Ajouter/modifier un wiki]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Discussion:mod/wiki/edit&amp;diff=3909</id>
		<title>Discussion:mod/wiki/edit</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Discussion:mod/wiki/edit&amp;diff=3909"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T21:46:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Ajouter/modifier un wiki&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Ajouter/modifier un wiki]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/create&amp;diff=3908</id>
		<title>mod/wiki/create</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/create&amp;diff=3908"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T21:46:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Wiki&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Wiki]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/mod&amp;diff=3907</id>
		<title>mod/wiki/mod</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=mod/wiki/mod&amp;diff=3907"/>
		<updated>2014-01-24T21:45:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Wiki&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Wiki]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=grade/edit/tree/calculation&amp;diff=3763</id>
		<title>grade/edit/tree/calculation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=grade/edit/tree/calculation&amp;diff=3763"/>
		<updated>2013-12-23T19:00:26Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Calcul de note&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Calcul de note]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=grade/calculation&amp;diff=3762</id>
		<title>grade/calculation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=grade/calculation&amp;diff=3762"/>
		<updated>2013-12-23T18:59:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page redirigée vers Calcul de note&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECTION [[Calcul de note]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=grade/calculation&amp;diff=3761</id>
		<title>grade/calculation</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=grade/calculation&amp;diff=3761"/>
		<updated>2013-12-23T18:58:28Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page créée avec « #Calcul de note »&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#Calcul de note&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Liens_automatique_de_activit%C3%A9s&amp;diff=3589</id>
		<title>Liens automatique de activités</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Liens_automatique_de_activit%C3%A9s&amp;diff=3589"/>
		<updated>2013-10-22T18:16:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page créée avec « {{Filtres}} Le filtre &amp;quot;Liens automatique de Base de données&amp;quot; est un filtre de site permettant le lien d&amp;#039;un nom/titre (mot ou phrase)vers un concept de même orthographe v... »&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Filtres}}&lt;br /&gt;
Le filtre &amp;quot;Liens automatique de Base de données&amp;quot; est un filtre de site permettant le lien d&#039;un nom/titre (mot ou phrase)vers un concept de même orthographe vers la base de données. Ceci inclus les discussions de forums, les pages, les étiquettes, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cette fonction doit être activé par un administrateur du site via &#039;&#039;Paramètres ­&amp;gt; Administration du site &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt;`Filtres &#039;&#039;. Ce filtre peut être activé en sélectionnant soit à &#039;&#039;&#039;Activé&#039;&#039;&#039; ou à &#039;&#039;&#039;Désactivé, mais disponible&#039;&#039;&#039;. Cette dernière option permet l&#039;activation du filtre au niveau de l&#039;activité individuelle et non du site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: Si des fiches sont requises avant la visualisation, le lien automatique devrait être désactivé. Ceci est recommandé, car le filtre d&#039;auto-lien ne peut pas déterminer si l&#039;utilisateur a créé une fiche ou non.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
De plus, vous pouvez appliquer ce filtre à &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu&#039;&#039;&#039; ou à &#039;&#039;&#039;Contenu et rubriques&amp;quot; dans un cours. Par contre, ceci peut accentuer le temps de chargement des serveurs. Il est recommandé d&#039;utiliser  avec modération le paramètre &#039;Appliquer à&#039;. Son utilisation principale est avec le filtre multilang.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En utilisant les flèches haut et bas dans la colonne Ordre, vous pouvez spécifier l&#039;ordre dans lequel les filtres sont appliqués. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Auto-Verlinkung zu Datenbanken]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3588</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3588"/>
		<updated>2013-10-22T18:00:58Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Exporting to an external portfolio */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affichage fiche ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permet de visualiser une fiche à la fois. Par conséquence, l&#039;information en détail est affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ajouter un commentaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;option est activée, vous pouvez ajouter un commentaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Évaluation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;évaluation est activée et rendu visible par l&#039;enseignant, vous pourrez noter et visualiser d&#039;autres fiches de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ajout d&#039;une fiche==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &amp;quot;Ajouter une fiche&amp;quot; et remplissez le formulaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lier automatiquement les fiches de la base de données==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le filtre [[Liens automatique de activités]] est activé, les fiches de la base de données seront liées avec le mot concept qui se retrouve dans le cadre du cours. Cela inclus les discussions de forum, les ressources, les résumés de semaine, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Si vous ne voulez pas de lien automatique sur partie de texte ou un mot en particulier, ajoutez &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; et &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; autour. Autrement, vous pouvez désactivé le filtre [[Liens automatique de activités]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importation de fiches en masse==&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez importer des fiches via CSV en cliquant sur le lien &amp;quot;Importer des fiches&amp;quot; dans le bloc Réglages &amp;gt; Administration de la base de données. CSV signifie Comma-Separated-Values et est un format commun pour l&#039;échange de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer facilement le format du fichier texte, créez une fiche puis exportez la. Le fichier texte exporté pourra être ensuite édité et utilisé pour l&#039;importation de fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le format attendu est un fichier texte simple avec une liste de noms de champs en premier. Par la suite, les données suivent, une par ligne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le séparateur est une virgule par défaut et l&#039;enclos pour le champ n&#039;est pas réglé par défaut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données devraient être séparées par de nouvelles lignes (générées en pesant sur ENTRÉE dans votre éditeur de texte). Les espacements sont définis en utilisant /t et les nouvelles lignes avec /n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exemple de fichier:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  nom,grandeur,poids&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certains types de champs de sont pas supportés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N&#039;entrez pas d&#039;espace après vos virgules. Cela générera une erreur lors de l&#039;importation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la page import.php retourne vide, l&#039;importation a été un échec. &lt;br /&gt;
Autrement, c&#039;est un succès avec le message affiché &amp;quot;1 fiche enregistrée&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporter des fiches==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez exporter des fiches en format CSV (comma separated values) ou ODS (OpenOffice Calc) en cliquant l&#039;onglet correspondant ou en cliquant sur le lien &amp;quot;Exporter des fiches&amp;quot; dans le bloc &amp;quot;Administration de base de données&amp;quot;. Chaque format peut être ouvert avec MS Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En format CSV, l&#039;utilisateur peut sélectionner soit la virgule, le point-virgule ou un espacement comme séparateur de champ. Il est important de sélectionner le bon caractère. Si l&#039;utilisateur sélectionne les virgules pour séparer les champs et les champs contenant de l&#039;information, alors le nombre de colonnes sera désalignés et causera la confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les utilisateurs peuvent sélectionner quels champs de la base de données ils souhaitent exporter. Par défaut, tous les champs sont cochés, mais il est possible de choisir ce qui sera inclus dans l&#039;exportation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une fois le type d&#039;exportation et les champs choisis, le bouton &amp;quot;Exporter les fiches&amp;quot; générera le fichier. L&#039;utilisateur aura l&#039;option de sauvegarder ou ouvrir le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporter dans un portfolio externe==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un portfolio externe, comme [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] a été activé par l&#039;administrateur, alors les utilisateurs auront l&#039;option d&#039;exporter des fiches dans ce portefolio. De plus, une icône &amp;quot;Exporter&amp;quot; sera disponible au bas de chaque fiche afin de sélection le portfolio destinataire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3587</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3587"/>
		<updated>2013-10-22T17:55:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Exporting entries */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affichage fiche ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permet de visualiser une fiche à la fois. Par conséquence, l&#039;information en détail est affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ajouter un commentaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;option est activée, vous pouvez ajouter un commentaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Évaluation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;évaluation est activée et rendu visible par l&#039;enseignant, vous pourrez noter et visualiser d&#039;autres fiches de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ajout d&#039;une fiche==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &amp;quot;Ajouter une fiche&amp;quot; et remplissez le formulaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lier automatiquement les fiches de la base de données==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le filtre [[Liens automatique de activités]] est activé, les fiches de la base de données seront liées avec le mot concept qui se retrouve dans le cadre du cours. Cela inclus les discussions de forum, les ressources, les résumés de semaine, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Si vous ne voulez pas de lien automatique sur partie de texte ou un mot en particulier, ajoutez &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; et &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; autour. Autrement, vous pouvez désactivé le filtre [[Liens automatique de activités]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importation de fiches en masse==&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez importer des fiches via CSV en cliquant sur le lien &amp;quot;Importer des fiches&amp;quot; dans le bloc Réglages &amp;gt; Administration de la base de données. CSV signifie Comma-Separated-Values et est un format commun pour l&#039;échange de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer facilement le format du fichier texte, créez une fiche puis exportez la. Le fichier texte exporté pourra être ensuite édité et utilisé pour l&#039;importation de fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le format attendu est un fichier texte simple avec une liste de noms de champs en premier. Par la suite, les données suivent, une par ligne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le séparateur est une virgule par défaut et l&#039;enclos pour le champ n&#039;est pas réglé par défaut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données devraient être séparées par de nouvelles lignes (générées en pesant sur ENTRÉE dans votre éditeur de texte). Les espacements sont définis en utilisant /t et les nouvelles lignes avec /n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exemple de fichier:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  nom,grandeur,poids&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certains types de champs de sont pas supportés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N&#039;entrez pas d&#039;espace après vos virgules. Cela générera une erreur lors de l&#039;importation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la page import.php retourne vide, l&#039;importation a été un échec. &lt;br /&gt;
Autrement, c&#039;est un succès avec le message affiché &amp;quot;1 fiche enregistrée&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporter des fiches==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez exporter des fiches en format CSV (comma separated values) ou ODS (OpenOffice Calc) en cliquant l&#039;onglet correspondant ou en cliquant sur le lien &amp;quot;Exporter des fiches&amp;quot; dans le bloc &amp;quot;Administration de base de données&amp;quot;. Chaque format peut être ouvert avec MS Excel.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
En format CSV, l&#039;utilisateur peut sélectionner soit la virgule, le point-virgule ou un espacement comme séparateur de champ. Il est important de sélectionner le bon caractère. Si l&#039;utilisateur sélectionne les virgules pour séparer les champs et les champs contenant de l&#039;information, alors le nombre de colonnes sera désalignés et causera la confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les utilisateurs peuvent sélectionner quels champs de la base de données ils souhaitent exporter. Par défaut, tous les champs sont cochés, mais il est possible de choisir ce qui sera inclus dans l&#039;exportation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Une fois le type d&#039;exportation et les champs choisis, le bouton &amp;quot;Exporter les fiches&amp;quot; générera le fichier. L&#039;utilisateur aura l&#039;option de sauvegarder ou ouvrir le fichier.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3586</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3586"/>
		<updated>2013-10-22T15:03:04Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Importation de fiches en masse */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affichage fiche ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permet de visualiser une fiche à la fois. Par conséquence, l&#039;information en détail est affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ajouter un commentaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;option est activée, vous pouvez ajouter un commentaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Évaluation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;évaluation est activée et rendu visible par l&#039;enseignant, vous pourrez noter et visualiser d&#039;autres fiches de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ajout d&#039;une fiche==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &amp;quot;Ajouter une fiche&amp;quot; et remplissez le formulaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lier automatiquement les fiches de la base de données==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le filtre [[Liens automatique de activités]] est activé, les fiches de la base de données seront liées avec le mot concept qui se retrouve dans le cadre du cours. Cela inclus les discussions de forum, les ressources, les résumés de semaine, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Si vous ne voulez pas de lien automatique sur partie de texte ou un mot en particulier, ajoutez &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; et &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; autour. Autrement, vous pouvez désactivé le filtre [[Liens automatique de activités]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importation de fiches en masse==&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez importer des fiches via CSV en cliquant sur le lien &amp;quot;Importer des fiches&amp;quot; dans le bloc Réglages &amp;gt; Administration de la base de données. CSV signifie Comma-Separated-Values et est un format commun pour l&#039;échange de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer facilement le format du fichier texte, créez une fiche puis exportez la. Le fichier texte exporté pourra être ensuite édité et utilisé pour l&#039;importation de fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le format attendu est un fichier texte simple avec une liste de noms de champs en premier. Par la suite, les données suivent, une par ligne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le séparateur est une virgule par défaut et l&#039;enclos pour le champ n&#039;est pas réglé par défaut.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les données devraient être séparées par de nouvelles lignes (générées en pesant sur ENTRÉE dans votre éditeur de texte). Les espacements sont définis en utilisant /t et les nouvelles lignes avec /n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Exemple de fichier:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  nom,grandeur,poids&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certains types de champs de sont pas supportés.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
N&#039;entrez pas d&#039;espace après vos virgules. Cela générera une erreur lors de l&#039;importation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si la page import.php retourne vide, l&#039;importation a été un échec. &lt;br /&gt;
Autrement, c&#039;est un succès avec le message affiché &amp;quot;1 fiche enregistrée&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3585</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3585"/>
		<updated>2013-10-22T14:05:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Importation de fiches en masse */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affichage fiche ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permet de visualiser une fiche à la fois. Par conséquence, l&#039;information en détail est affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ajouter un commentaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;option est activée, vous pouvez ajouter un commentaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Évaluation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;évaluation est activée et rendu visible par l&#039;enseignant, vous pourrez noter et visualiser d&#039;autres fiches de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ajout d&#039;une fiche==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &amp;quot;Ajouter une fiche&amp;quot; et remplissez le formulaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lier automatiquement les fiches de la base de données==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le filtre [[Liens automatique de activités]] est activé, les fiches de la base de données seront liées avec le mot concept qui se retrouve dans le cadre du cours. Cela inclus les discussions de forum, les ressources, les résumés de semaine, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Si vous ne voulez pas de lien automatique sur partie de texte ou un mot en particulier, ajoutez &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; et &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; autour. Autrement, vous pouvez désactivé le filtre [[Liens automatique de activités]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importation de fiches en masse==&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez importer des fiches via CSV en cliquant sur le lien &amp;quot;Importer des fiches&amp;quot; dans le bloc Réglages &amp;gt; Administration de la base de données. CSV signifie Comma-Separated-Values et est un format commun pour l&#039;échange de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour déterminer facilement le format du fichier texte, créez une fiche puis exportez la. Le fichier texte exporté pourra être ensuite édité et utilisé pour l&#039;importation de fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le format attendu est un fichier texte simple avec une liste de noms de champs en premier. Par la suite, les données suivent, une par ligne.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3577</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3577"/>
		<updated>2013-10-21T17:19:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Automatically linking database entries */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affichage fiche ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permet de visualiser une fiche à la fois. Par conséquence, l&#039;information en détail est affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ajouter un commentaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;option est activée, vous pouvez ajouter un commentaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Évaluation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;évaluation est activée et rendu visible par l&#039;enseignant, vous pourrez noter et visualiser d&#039;autres fiches de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ajout d&#039;une fiche==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &amp;quot;Ajouter une fiche&amp;quot; et remplissez le formulaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Lier automatiquement les fiches de la base de données==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si le filtre [[Liens automatique de activités]] est activé, les fiches de la base de données seront liées avec le mot concept qui se retrouve dans le cadre du cours. Cela inclus les discussions de forum, les ressources, les résumés de semaine, etc. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Si vous ne voulez pas de lien automatique sur partie de texte ou un mot en particulier, ajoutez &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; et &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; autour. Autrement, vous pouvez désactivé le filtre [[Liens automatique de activités]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importation de fiches en masse==&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez importer des fiches via CSV en cliquant sur le lien &amp;quot;Importer des fiches&amp;quot; dans le bloc Réglages &amp;gt; Administration de la base de données. CSV signifie Comma-Separated-Values et est un format commun pour l&#039;échange de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3463</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3463"/>
		<updated>2013-08-14T18:28:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Importing many entries */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affichage fiche ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permet de visualiser une fiche à la fois. Par conséquence, l&#039;information en détail est affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ajouter un commentaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;option est activée, vous pouvez ajouter un commentaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Évaluation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;évaluation est activée et rendu visible par l&#039;enseignant, vous pourrez noter et visualiser d&#039;autres fiches de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ajout d&#039;une fiche==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &amp;quot;Ajouter une fiche&amp;quot; et remplissez le formulaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importation des fiches==&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez importer des fiches via CSV en cliquant sur le lien &amp;quot;Importer des fiches&amp;quot; dans le bloc Réglages &amp;gt; Administration de la base de donnée. CSV signifie Comma-Separated-Values et est un format commun pour l’inter-changement de texte.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Param%C3%A8tres_SCORM&amp;diff=3462</id>
		<title>Paramètres SCORM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Param%C3%A8tres_SCORM&amp;diff=3462"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T20:24:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Paquetage SCORM}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour ajouter un paquetage SCORM à un cours ou pour l&#039;éditer au niveau des paramètres, activez le mode édition en tant qu&#039;utilisateur avec permissions d&#039;édition.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SCORM activity can also be used to add AICC content running using AICC HACP (HTTP AICC Communication Protocol &amp;quot;Appendix A&amp;quot;), see CMI001 - AICC/CMI Guidelines For Interoperability [http://www.aicc.org/pages/down-docs-index.htm#cmi001]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating==&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;&#039;&#039;does not&#039;&#039;&#039; generate SCORM content. Moodle presents the content in SCORM packages to learners, and saves data from learner interactions with the SCORM package. See [[Tools for creating SCORM content]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding== &lt;br /&gt;
# While logged in as a teacher, select [[Image:Turn edit on button.JPG]] at the top right of a course homepage or in the course admin menu. See [[Turn_editing_on]].&lt;br /&gt;
# in one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add an activity...&#039;&#039;&#039; drop down menus that appear, select &#039;&#039;&#039;SCORM package&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing==&lt;br /&gt;
If the SCORM/AICC package has already been added, you can edit it by clicking the edit icon (pen) in the resource/activity list on front page of the course. If you are in the SCORM page, you can click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Update this SCORM&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Both these methods bring you to the settings page.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Setting page, the teacher can view the 3 settings areas, along with the save options buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-blank-settings.png|thumb|400px|center|Moodle 2.0 SCORM Setting Page ]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General settings===&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039; field records the short name of the activity. This appears in the navigation breadcrumb.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039; text is only seen after the name in the list shown when you choose &amp;quot;activities &amp;gt; Scorm&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Package file&#039;&#039;&#039; setting determines what SCORM package is used by this SCORM activity. To select the SCORM package, first select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Choose&#039;&#039;&#039; button to launch the file picker.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-settings.png|thumb|400px|center|Launch file picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
With the file picker launched, you can navigate to an existing file, or select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Choose&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the file picker to upload a new file.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-file-picker-choose.png|thumb|400px|center|Launch file picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
Browse to the new SCORM package on your local machine and select it. When you are returned to the file picker, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Upload&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-upload-file-to-site.png|thumb|400px|center|Launch file picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting files is difficult, you might want to learn more about the [[File picker]].&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Additional &#039;&#039;&#039;Package file&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are available when configured globally. See &#039;&#039;&#039;Admin settings&#039;&#039;&#039; below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Pressing the advance button will reveal all the choices below. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SCORM_settings_other_19.png|thumb|300px|right|Moodle 1.9 SCORM Other Settings block - advanced  shown ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Grading method&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** Learning Objects - This mode shows the number of completed/passed Learning Objects for the activity. The max value is the number of Package&#039;s Learning Objects. &#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If your SCORM package does report cmi.core.lesson_status, and does not report cmi.core.score.raw, then you should use this setting. &lt;br /&gt;
** Highest grade - The grade page will display the highest score obtained by users in all passed Learning Objects. &#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If your SCORM package does report cmi.core.score.raw, and does not report cmi.core.lesson_status, then you should use this setting, Average grade, or Sum grade. &lt;br /&gt;
** Average grade - If you choose this mode Moodle will calculate the average of all scores.&lt;br /&gt;
**Sum grade - With this mode all the scores will be added.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum grade&#039;&#039;&#039; - Not applicable if Grading Method is Learning objects. Usual setting is 100. If your SCO &#039;s high score is something other than 100, you should adjust this value appropriately. When grading Method is one of the score settings, then the gradebook grade is package score divided by this number. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of attempts&#039;&#039;&#039; - Defines the number of attempts permitted to users. It works only with SCORM 1.2 and AICC packages. SCORM2004 has its own max attempts definition. &lt;br /&gt;
** The option to start a new attempt is provided by a checkbox above the &#039;&#039;&#039;Enter&#039;&#039;&#039; button on the content structure page, so be sure you&#039;re providing access to that page if you want to allow more than one attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
** An attempt is not complete until the cmi.core.lesson_status for the attempt is set to either &#039;completed&#039; or &#039;passed&#039;. After that, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Start new attempt&#039;&#039;&#039; checkbox is available to the learner.  &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Attempts grading&#039;&#039;&#039; - When you permit multiple attempts for students, you can choose how to record the result in gradebook by first, last, average or highest settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039; - Stage size width as a css value, either % or pixels. Default is 100%. You can change to a different percentage by putting a % symbol after the number (ex. 80%). You can also set to a pixels value by entering a number higher than 100 (ex. 800). &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039; - Stage size height as a css value, either % or pixels. Default is 500 pixels. You can change to a percentage by putting a % symbol after the number (ex. 80%). You can also set to a pixels value by entering a number higher than 100 (ex. 800). &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display package&#039;&#039;&#039; - in current or new window &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; - There are a series of check boxes for:Allow the window to be resized ad scrolled, displaying directory links, location bar, menu bar, toolbar and/or status.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Student skip content structure page&#039;&#039;&#039; - never, first access, always&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Disable preview mode&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this option is set to Yes, the Preview button in the view page of a SCORM/AICC Package activity will be hidden. The student can choose to preview (browse mode) the activity or attempt it in the normal mode. When a Learning Object is completed in preview (browse) mode, it&#039;s marked with browsed icon&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Course structure display&#039;&#039;&#039; - Table of Contents display&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hide navigation buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-Continue&#039;&#039;&#039; - If Auto-continue is set to Yes, when a Learning Object calls the &amp;quot;close communication&amp;quot; method, the next available Learning Object is launched automatically.If it is set to No, the users must use the &amp;quot;Continue&amp;quot; button to go on.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Auto-Continue will only to move from one SCORM to the next in the same topic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display package&#039;&#039;&#039; - Allow the window to be resized, Allow the window to be scrolled, Show the directory links, Show the location bar, Show the menu bar, Show the toolbar, Show the status bar.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Display attempt status&#039;&#039;&#039; - If enabled, scores and grades for attempts are displayed on the SCORM outline page. This setting makes the block display more info to the user on the entry page to the SCORM and in the course overview block - if you turn it off it will display less info. This setting is helpful when debugging grading issues - working out why a user got a certain grade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Display course structure&lt;br /&gt;
* Force completed&lt;br /&gt;
* Force new attempt&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock after final attempt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Common module settings===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Save settings===&lt;br /&gt;
As in most activities there are 3 save button choices. &#039;&#039;&#039;Cancel&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Save and return to course&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Save changes&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons.  The Save changes button will take the teacher back to the SCORM &amp;quot;stage&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-admin-nav.png|thumb|163px|right|Moodle 2.0 SCORM Admin Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
These options are available to the site admin in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; menu: &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity Modules &amp;gt; SCORM Package&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Value Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Many of the settings available in the SCORM Package administration simply set the default value for the SCORM activity module setup options provided within courses. Edit these settings to save yourself time when adding large numbers of packages, or to establish a standard for presentation across the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other Important Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
The following options provided which &#039;&#039;&#039;do not&#039;&#039;&#039; simply set a default value for the SCORM activity editing page view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Synchronization time&lt;br /&gt;
:For SCORM packages that have the auto-update setting to &#039;Every Day&#039; this defines what time the process should run.&lt;br /&gt;
;Enable external package type&lt;br /&gt;
:If selected, presents a text field to paste a URL to a remote imsmanifest.xml (in an unzipped remote SCORM package), as well as the file picker option provided by default. Note that the content is played from the designated location, and not unpacked into the Moodle file system. So any reporting data will not be saved via the SCORM API in to Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
;Enable downloaded package type&lt;br /&gt;
:If selected, presents a text field to paste a URL to a remote package.zip SCORM package. Package is downloaded and unzipped into the Moodle file system. &lt;br /&gt;
;Enable IMS package type&lt;br /&gt;
:Enables a package to be selected from within an IMS repository&lt;br /&gt;
;Force users to enable JavaScript&lt;br /&gt;
:Since the SCORM API uses JavaScript to save data to Moodle, this is a great idea!&lt;br /&gt;
;Activate API debug and tracing (set the capture mask with apidebugmask)&lt;br /&gt;
:Turns on debugging for SCORM activities. In Moodle 2 you no longer have to also turn on debugging in the developer options. &lt;br /&gt;
;API debug capture mask&lt;br /&gt;
:.* will debug for admin user only: You can use the mask to enable debugging under certain conditions. For example, if you are logged in using the admin user (username admin) you can set the api mask to: &#039;&#039;&#039;admin.*&#039;&#039;&#039; Users not logged in as admin will not see the debugging log. The &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot; api mask is &#039;&#039;&#039;.*&#039;&#039;&#039; which translates roughly to &#039;&#039;&#039;everybody&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}};Enable direct AICC url&lt;br /&gt;
:Makes it easier to connect to externally hosted AICC content as the teacher doesn&#039;t have to create an AICC package and is able to link directly to the external AICC url.&lt;br /&gt;
;Enable external AICC HACP&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}:The SCORM activity can also support external AICC HACP Communication where the AICC package is hosted on an external content providers site and passes back http requests directly from the external server instead of within the users web browser session - this is disabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:dev:SCORM_schema |SCORM Schema]] for developers&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=214527 External AICC HACP setting] in a specific Windows environment (WISP, NTLM, ISA)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lernpaket konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:SCORMを追加/編集する]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Paquetage_SCORM&amp;diff=3461</id>
		<title>Paquetage SCORM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Paquetage_SCORM&amp;diff=3461"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T20:12:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le module SCORM vous permet (l&#039;enseignant) de déposer un paquet SCORM ou AICC pour l&#039;inclure dans votre cours.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
SCORM (Sharable Content Object Reference Model) est une collection de spécifications qui permettent l&#039;interopérabilité, l&#039;accessibilité et la réutilisation de contenu d&#039;apprentissage basé sur le Web. Le contenu SCORM peut être livré via n&#039;importe quel système de gestion de l&#039;apprentissage (LMS) compatible en utilisant la même version de SCORM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Paramètres SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Utiliser SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Créer contenu SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[FAQ SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussions sur STORM dans les forums Moodle (en anglais):&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=3757 Simple introduction to SCORM] &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=57059 Are there any sugestions for scorm authoring with Microsoft word / or any other easy (maybe free) scorm authoring tool?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=95946 Is SCORM worth it?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lernpaket]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Param%C3%A8tres_SCORM&amp;diff=3460</id>
		<title>Paramètres SCORM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Param%C3%A8tres_SCORM&amp;diff=3460"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T20:11:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Paquetage SCORM}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a SCORM package to a course, or to edit the SCORM activity settings, turn on the course edit mode as a teacher with editing privileges. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SCORM activity can also be used to add AICC content running using AICC HACP (HTTP AICC Communication Protocol &amp;quot;Appendix A&amp;quot;), see CMI001 - AICC/CMI Guidelines For Interoperability [http://www.aicc.org/pages/down-docs-index.htm#cmi001]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating==&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;&#039;&#039;does not&#039;&#039;&#039; generate SCORM content. Moodle presents the content in SCORM packages to learners, and saves data from learner interactions with the SCORM package. See [[Tools for creating SCORM content]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding== &lt;br /&gt;
# While logged in as a teacher, select [[Image:Turn edit on button.JPG]] at the top right of a course homepage or in the course admin menu. See [[Turn_editing_on]].&lt;br /&gt;
# in one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add an activity...&#039;&#039;&#039; drop down menus that appear, select &#039;&#039;&#039;SCORM package&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing==&lt;br /&gt;
If the SCORM/AICC package has already been added, you can edit it by clicking the edit icon (pen) in the resource/activity list on front page of the course. If you are in the SCORM page, you can click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Update this SCORM&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Both these methods bring you to the settings page.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Setting page, the teacher can view the 3 settings areas, along with the save options buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-blank-settings.png|thumb|400px|center|Moodle 2.0 SCORM Setting Page ]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General settings===&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039; field records the short name of the activity. This appears in the navigation breadcrumb.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039; text is only seen after the name in the list shown when you choose &amp;quot;activities &amp;gt; Scorm&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Package file&#039;&#039;&#039; setting determines what SCORM package is used by this SCORM activity. To select the SCORM package, first select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Choose&#039;&#039;&#039; button to launch the file picker.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-settings.png|thumb|400px|center|Launch file picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
With the file picker launched, you can navigate to an existing file, or select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Choose&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the file picker to upload a new file.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-file-picker-choose.png|thumb|400px|center|Launch file picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
Browse to the new SCORM package on your local machine and select it. When you are returned to the file picker, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Upload&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-upload-file-to-site.png|thumb|400px|center|Launch file picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting files is difficult, you might want to learn more about the [[File picker]].&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Additional &#039;&#039;&#039;Package file&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are available when configured globally. See &#039;&#039;&#039;Admin settings&#039;&#039;&#039; below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Pressing the advance button will reveal all the choices below. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SCORM_settings_other_19.png|thumb|300px|right|Moodle 1.9 SCORM Other Settings block - advanced  shown ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Grading method&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** Learning Objects - This mode shows the number of completed/passed Learning Objects for the activity. The max value is the number of Package&#039;s Learning Objects. &#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If your SCORM package does report cmi.core.lesson_status, and does not report cmi.core.score.raw, then you should use this setting. &lt;br /&gt;
** Highest grade - The grade page will display the highest score obtained by users in all passed Learning Objects. &#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If your SCORM package does report cmi.core.score.raw, and does not report cmi.core.lesson_status, then you should use this setting, Average grade, or Sum grade. &lt;br /&gt;
** Average grade - If you choose this mode Moodle will calculate the average of all scores.&lt;br /&gt;
**Sum grade - With this mode all the scores will be added.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum grade&#039;&#039;&#039; - Not applicable if Grading Method is Learning objects. Usual setting is 100. If your SCO &#039;s high score is something other than 100, you should adjust this value appropriately. When grading Method is one of the score settings, then the gradebook grade is package score divided by this number. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of attempts&#039;&#039;&#039; - Defines the number of attempts permitted to users. It works only with SCORM 1.2 and AICC packages. SCORM2004 has its own max attempts definition. &lt;br /&gt;
** The option to start a new attempt is provided by a checkbox above the &#039;&#039;&#039;Enter&#039;&#039;&#039; button on the content structure page, so be sure you&#039;re providing access to that page if you want to allow more than one attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
** An attempt is not complete until the cmi.core.lesson_status for the attempt is set to either &#039;completed&#039; or &#039;passed&#039;. After that, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Start new attempt&#039;&#039;&#039; checkbox is available to the learner.  &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Attempts grading&#039;&#039;&#039; - When you permit multiple attempts for students, you can choose how to record the result in gradebook by first, last, average or highest settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039; - Stage size width as a css value, either % or pixels. Default is 100%. You can change to a different percentage by putting a % symbol after the number (ex. 80%). You can also set to a pixels value by entering a number higher than 100 (ex. 800). &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039; - Stage size height as a css value, either % or pixels. Default is 500 pixels. You can change to a percentage by putting a % symbol after the number (ex. 80%). You can also set to a pixels value by entering a number higher than 100 (ex. 800). &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display package&#039;&#039;&#039; - in current or new window &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; - There are a series of check boxes for:Allow the window to be resized ad scrolled, displaying directory links, location bar, menu bar, toolbar and/or status.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Student skip content structure page&#039;&#039;&#039; - never, first access, always&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Disable preview mode&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this option is set to Yes, the Preview button in the view page of a SCORM/AICC Package activity will be hidden. The student can choose to preview (browse mode) the activity or attempt it in the normal mode. When a Learning Object is completed in preview (browse) mode, it&#039;s marked with browsed icon&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Course structure display&#039;&#039;&#039; - Table of Contents display&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hide navigation buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-Continue&#039;&#039;&#039; - If Auto-continue is set to Yes, when a Learning Object calls the &amp;quot;close communication&amp;quot; method, the next available Learning Object is launched automatically.If it is set to No, the users must use the &amp;quot;Continue&amp;quot; button to go on.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Auto-Continue will only to move from one SCORM to the next in the same topic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display package&#039;&#039;&#039; - Allow the window to be resized, Allow the window to be scrolled, Show the directory links, Show the location bar, Show the menu bar, Show the toolbar, Show the status bar.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Display attempt status&#039;&#039;&#039; - If enabled, scores and grades for attempts are displayed on the SCORM outline page. This setting makes the block display more info to the user on the entry page to the SCORM and in the course overview block - if you turn it off it will display less info. This setting is helpful when debugging grading issues - working out why a user got a certain grade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Display course structure&lt;br /&gt;
* Force completed&lt;br /&gt;
* Force new attempt&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock after final attempt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Common module settings===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Save settings===&lt;br /&gt;
As in most activities there are 3 save button choices. &#039;&#039;&#039;Cancel&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Save and return to course&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Save changes&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons.  The Save changes button will take the teacher back to the SCORM &amp;quot;stage&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-admin-nav.png|thumb|163px|right|Moodle 2.0 SCORM Admin Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
These options are available to the site admin in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; menu: &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity Modules &amp;gt; SCORM Package&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Value Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Many of the settings available in the SCORM Package administration simply set the default value for the SCORM activity module setup options provided within courses. Edit these settings to save yourself time when adding large numbers of packages, or to establish a standard for presentation across the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other Important Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
The following options provided which &#039;&#039;&#039;do not&#039;&#039;&#039; simply set a default value for the SCORM activity editing page view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Synchronization time&lt;br /&gt;
:For SCORM packages that have the auto-update setting to &#039;Every Day&#039; this defines what time the process should run.&lt;br /&gt;
;Enable external package type&lt;br /&gt;
:If selected, presents a text field to paste a URL to a remote imsmanifest.xml (in an unzipped remote SCORM package), as well as the file picker option provided by default. Note that the content is played from the designated location, and not unpacked into the Moodle file system. So any reporting data will not be saved via the SCORM API in to Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
;Enable downloaded package type&lt;br /&gt;
:If selected, presents a text field to paste a URL to a remote package.zip SCORM package. Package is downloaded and unzipped into the Moodle file system. &lt;br /&gt;
;Enable IMS package type&lt;br /&gt;
:Enables a package to be selected from within an IMS repository&lt;br /&gt;
;Force users to enable JavaScript&lt;br /&gt;
:Since the SCORM API uses JavaScript to save data to Moodle, this is a great idea!&lt;br /&gt;
;Activate API debug and tracing (set the capture mask with apidebugmask)&lt;br /&gt;
:Turns on debugging for SCORM activities. In Moodle 2 you no longer have to also turn on debugging in the developer options. &lt;br /&gt;
;API debug capture mask&lt;br /&gt;
:.* will debug for admin user only: You can use the mask to enable debugging under certain conditions. For example, if you are logged in using the admin user (username admin) you can set the api mask to: &#039;&#039;&#039;admin.*&#039;&#039;&#039; Users not logged in as admin will not see the debugging log. The &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot; api mask is &#039;&#039;&#039;.*&#039;&#039;&#039; which translates roughly to &#039;&#039;&#039;everybody&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}};Enable direct AICC url&lt;br /&gt;
:Makes it easier to connect to externally hosted AICC content as the teacher doesn&#039;t have to create an AICC package and is able to link directly to the external AICC url.&lt;br /&gt;
;Enable external AICC HACP&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}:The SCORM activity can also support external AICC HACP Communication where the AICC package is hosted on an external content providers site and passes back http requests directly from the external server instead of within the users web browser session - this is disabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:dev:SCORM_schema |SCORM Schema]] for developers&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=214527 External AICC HACP setting] in a specific Windows environment (WISP, NTLM, ISA)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lernpaket konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:SCORMを追加/編集する]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Param%C3%A8tres_SCORM&amp;diff=3459</id>
		<title>Paramètres SCORM</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Param%C3%A8tres_SCORM&amp;diff=3459"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T20:10:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{SCORM}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a SCORM package to a course, or to edit the SCORM activity settings, turn on the course edit mode as a teacher with editing privileges. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The SCORM activity can also be used to add AICC content running using AICC HACP (HTTP AICC Communication Protocol &amp;quot;Appendix A&amp;quot;), see CMI001 - AICC/CMI Guidelines For Interoperability [http://www.aicc.org/pages/down-docs-index.htm#cmi001]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating==&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;&#039;&#039;does not&#039;&#039;&#039; generate SCORM content. Moodle presents the content in SCORM packages to learners, and saves data from learner interactions with the SCORM package. See [[Tools for creating SCORM content]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding== &lt;br /&gt;
# While logged in as a teacher, select [[Image:Turn edit on button.JPG]] at the top right of a course homepage or in the course admin menu. See [[Turn_editing_on]].&lt;br /&gt;
# in one of the &#039;&#039;&#039;Add an activity...&#039;&#039;&#039; drop down menus that appear, select &#039;&#039;&#039;SCORM package&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Editing==&lt;br /&gt;
If the SCORM/AICC package has already been added, you can edit it by clicking the edit icon (pen) in the resource/activity list on front page of the course. If you are in the SCORM page, you can click the &#039;&#039;&#039;Update this SCORM&#039;&#039;&#039; button. Both these methods bring you to the settings page.&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Settings==&lt;br /&gt;
On the Setting page, the teacher can view the 3 settings areas, along with the save options buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-blank-settings.png|thumb|400px|center|Moodle 2.0 SCORM Setting Page ]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===General settings===&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Name&#039;&#039;&#039; field records the short name of the activity. This appears in the navigation breadcrumb.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Description&#039;&#039;&#039; text is only seen after the name in the list shown when you choose &amp;quot;activities &amp;gt; Scorm&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Package file&#039;&#039;&#039; setting determines what SCORM package is used by this SCORM activity. To select the SCORM package, first select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Choose&#039;&#039;&#039; button to launch the file picker.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-settings.png|thumb|400px|center|Launch file picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
With the file picker launched, you can navigate to an existing file, or select the &#039;&#039;&#039;Choose&#039;&#039;&#039; button in the file picker to upload a new file.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-file-picker-choose.png|thumb|400px|center|Launch file picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
Browse to the new SCORM package on your local machine and select it. When you are returned to the file picker, select &#039;&#039;&#039;Upload&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-upload-file-to-site.png|thumb|400px|center|Launch file picker]]&lt;br /&gt;
If selecting files is difficult, you might want to learn more about the [[File picker]].&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; Additional &#039;&#039;&#039;Package file&#039;&#039;&#039; settings are available when configured globally. See &#039;&#039;&#039;Admin settings&#039;&#039;&#039; below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Pressing the advance button will reveal all the choices below. &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:SCORM_settings_other_19.png|thumb|300px|right|Moodle 1.9 SCORM Other Settings block - advanced  shown ]]&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Grading method&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
** Learning Objects - This mode shows the number of completed/passed Learning Objects for the activity. The max value is the number of Package&#039;s Learning Objects. &#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If your SCORM package does report cmi.core.lesson_status, and does not report cmi.core.score.raw, then you should use this setting. &lt;br /&gt;
** Highest grade - The grade page will display the highest score obtained by users in all passed Learning Objects. &#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; If your SCORM package does report cmi.core.score.raw, and does not report cmi.core.lesson_status, then you should use this setting, Average grade, or Sum grade. &lt;br /&gt;
** Average grade - If you choose this mode Moodle will calculate the average of all scores.&lt;br /&gt;
**Sum grade - With this mode all the scores will be added.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum grade&#039;&#039;&#039; - Not applicable if Grading Method is Learning objects. Usual setting is 100. If your SCO &#039;s high score is something other than 100, you should adjust this value appropriately. When grading Method is one of the score settings, then the gradebook grade is package score divided by this number. &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Number of attempts&#039;&#039;&#039; - Defines the number of attempts permitted to users. It works only with SCORM 1.2 and AICC packages. SCORM2004 has its own max attempts definition. &lt;br /&gt;
** The option to start a new attempt is provided by a checkbox above the &#039;&#039;&#039;Enter&#039;&#039;&#039; button on the content structure page, so be sure you&#039;re providing access to that page if you want to allow more than one attempt.&lt;br /&gt;
** An attempt is not complete until the cmi.core.lesson_status for the attempt is set to either &#039;completed&#039; or &#039;passed&#039;. After that, the &#039;&#039;&#039;Start new attempt&#039;&#039;&#039; checkbox is available to the learner.  &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Attempts grading&#039;&#039;&#039; - When you permit multiple attempts for students, you can choose how to record the result in gradebook by first, last, average or highest settings.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Width&#039;&#039;&#039; - Stage size width as a css value, either % or pixels. Default is 100%. You can change to a different percentage by putting a % symbol after the number (ex. 80%). You can also set to a pixels value by entering a number higher than 100 (ex. 800). &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Height&#039;&#039;&#039; - Stage size height as a css value, either % or pixels. Default is 500 pixels. You can change to a percentage by putting a % symbol after the number (ex. 80%). You can also set to a pixels value by entering a number higher than 100 (ex. 800). &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display package&#039;&#039;&#039; - in current or new window &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Options&#039;&#039;&#039; - There are a series of check boxes for:Allow the window to be resized ad scrolled, displaying directory links, location bar, menu bar, toolbar and/or status.&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Student skip content structure page&#039;&#039;&#039; - never, first access, always&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Disable preview mode&#039;&#039;&#039; - If this option is set to Yes, the Preview button in the view page of a SCORM/AICC Package activity will be hidden. The student can choose to preview (browse mode) the activity or attempt it in the normal mode. When a Learning Object is completed in preview (browse) mode, it&#039;s marked with browsed icon&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Course structure display&#039;&#039;&#039; - Table of Contents display&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Hide navigation buttons&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Auto-Continue&#039;&#039;&#039; - If Auto-continue is set to Yes, when a Learning Object calls the &amp;quot;close communication&amp;quot; method, the next available Learning Object is launched automatically.If it is set to No, the users must use the &amp;quot;Continue&amp;quot; button to go on.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Auto-Continue will only to move from one SCORM to the next in the same topic. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;&#039;Display package&#039;&#039;&#039; - Allow the window to be resized, Allow the window to be scrolled, Show the directory links, Show the location bar, Show the menu bar, Show the toolbar, Show the status bar.&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;Display attempt status&#039;&#039;&#039; - If enabled, scores and grades for attempts are displayed on the SCORM outline page. This setting makes the block display more info to the user on the entry page to the SCORM and in the course overview block - if you turn it off it will display less info. This setting is helpful when debugging grading issues - working out why a user got a certain grade.&lt;br /&gt;
* Display course structure&lt;br /&gt;
* Force completed&lt;br /&gt;
* Force new attempt&lt;br /&gt;
* Lock after final attempt&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Common module settings===&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Save settings===&lt;br /&gt;
As in most activities there are 3 save button choices. &#039;&#039;&#039;Cancel&#039;&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;&#039;Save and return to course&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;Save changes&#039;&#039;&#039; buttons.  The Save changes button will take the teacher back to the SCORM &amp;quot;stage&amp;quot; page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:M2-scorm-admin-nav.png|thumb|163px|right|Moodle 2.0 SCORM Admin Settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
These options are available to the site admin in the &#039;&#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039;&#039; menu: &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity Modules &amp;gt; SCORM Package&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Default Value Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
Many of the settings available in the SCORM Package administration simply set the default value for the SCORM activity module setup options provided within courses. Edit these settings to save yourself time when adding large numbers of packages, or to establish a standard for presentation across the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Other Important Settings===&lt;br /&gt;
The following options provided which &#039;&#039;&#039;do not&#039;&#039;&#039; simply set a default value for the SCORM activity editing page view. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Synchronization time&lt;br /&gt;
:For SCORM packages that have the auto-update setting to &#039;Every Day&#039; this defines what time the process should run.&lt;br /&gt;
;Enable external package type&lt;br /&gt;
:If selected, presents a text field to paste a URL to a remote imsmanifest.xml (in an unzipped remote SCORM package), as well as the file picker option provided by default. Note that the content is played from the designated location, and not unpacked into the Moodle file system. So any reporting data will not be saved via the SCORM API in to Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
;Enable downloaded package type&lt;br /&gt;
:If selected, presents a text field to paste a URL to a remote package.zip SCORM package. Package is downloaded and unzipped into the Moodle file system. &lt;br /&gt;
;Enable IMS package type&lt;br /&gt;
:Enables a package to be selected from within an IMS repository&lt;br /&gt;
;Force users to enable JavaScript&lt;br /&gt;
:Since the SCORM API uses JavaScript to save data to Moodle, this is a great idea!&lt;br /&gt;
;Activate API debug and tracing (set the capture mask with apidebugmask)&lt;br /&gt;
:Turns on debugging for SCORM activities. In Moodle 2 you no longer have to also turn on debugging in the developer options. &lt;br /&gt;
;API debug capture mask&lt;br /&gt;
:.* will debug for admin user only: You can use the mask to enable debugging under certain conditions. For example, if you are logged in using the admin user (username admin) you can set the api mask to: &#039;&#039;&#039;admin.*&#039;&#039;&#039; Users not logged in as admin will not see the debugging log. The &amp;quot;Default&amp;quot; api mask is &#039;&#039;&#039;.*&#039;&#039;&#039; which translates roughly to &#039;&#039;&#039;everybody&#039;&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}};Enable direct AICC url&lt;br /&gt;
:Makes it easier to connect to externally hosted AICC content as the teacher doesn&#039;t have to create an AICC package and is able to link directly to the external AICC url.&lt;br /&gt;
;Enable external AICC HACP&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}:The SCORM activity can also support external AICC HACP Communication where the AICC package is hosted on an external content providers site and passes back http requests directly from the external server instead of within the users web browser session - this is disabled by default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[:dev:SCORM_schema |SCORM Schema]] for developers&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=214527 External AICC HACP setting] in a specific Windows environment (WISP, NTLM, ISA)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Teacher]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lernpaket konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un SCORM]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:SCORMを追加/編集する]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3458</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3458"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T17:33:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Adding an entry */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affichage fiche ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permet de visualiser une fiche à la fois. Par conséquence, l&#039;information en détail est affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ajouter un commentaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;option est activée, vous pouvez ajouter un commentaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Évaluation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;évaluation est activée et rendu visible par l&#039;enseignant, vous pourrez noter et visualiser d&#039;autres fiches de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ajout d&#039;une fiche==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Cliquez sur l&#039;onglet &amp;quot;Ajouter une fiche&amp;quot; et remplissez le formulaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link in the Database activity administration block. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3457</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3457"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T17:26:32Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Rate entries */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affichage fiche ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permet de visualiser une fiche à la fois. Par conséquence, l&#039;information en détail est affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ajouter un commentaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;option est activée, vous pouvez ajouter un commentaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Évaluation ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;évaluation est activée et rendu visible par l&#039;enseignant, vous pourrez noter et visualiser d&#039;autres fiches de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding an entry==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;Add entry&amp;quot; tab and fill in the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link in the Database activity administration block. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3456</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3456"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T15:29:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Add comment */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affichage fiche ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permet de visualiser une fiche à la fois. Par conséquence, l&#039;information en détail est affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Ajouter un commentaire ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si l&#039;option est activée, vous pouvez ajouter un commentaire.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate entries ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If ratings have been enabled, and made viewable, by the database editor, you may [[Grades|grade]] other database entries, and view these ratings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding an entry==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;Add entry&amp;quot; tab and fill in the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link in the Database activity administration block. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3455</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3455"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T15:27:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* View single */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Affichage fiche ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Permet de visualiser une fiche à la fois. Par conséquence, l&#039;information en détail est affiché.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add comment ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If comments have been enabled, you may add a comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate entries ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If ratings have been enabled, and made viewable, by the database editor, you may [[Grades|grade]] other database entries, and view these ratings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding an entry==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;Add entry&amp;quot; tab and fill in the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link in the Database activity administration block. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3454</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3454"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T15:24:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Affichage liste */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (flèches rouges): plusieurs fiches à la fois (le nombre est défini par l&#039;utilisateur)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Ajouter une fiche&#039;&#039; (flèches vertes): ajouter une fiche à la base de données&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Les icônes en surbrillances jaune sont pour éditer, visualiser  et supprimer la fiche de la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== View single ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you may view only one entry at a time. This might allow you to view more detailed information than the list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add comment ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If comments have been enabled, you may add a comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate entries ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If ratings have been enabled, and made viewable, by the database editor, you may [[Grades|grade]] other database entries, and view these ratings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding an entry==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;Add entry&amp;quot; tab and fill in the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link in the Database activity administration block. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3453</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3453"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T15:15:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Affichage liste */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage fiche&#039;&#039;: une fiche à la fois&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Affichage liste&#039;&#039; (red arrow): several items at a time (number is user defined)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Add entry&#039;&#039; (green arrows): add an item to the database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The icons highlighted in yellow are for editing, viewing and deleting an item in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Dbasetabs.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== View single ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you may view only one entry at a time. This might allow you to view more detailed information than the list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add comment ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If comments have been enabled, you may add a comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate entries ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If ratings have been enabled, and made viewable, by the database editor, you may [[Grades|grade]] other database entries, and view these ratings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding an entry==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;Add entry&amp;quot; tab and fill in the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link in the Database activity administration block. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3452</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3452"/>
		<updated>2013-08-06T14:06:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Affichage liste */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;affichage liste présente plusieurs fiches sous une forme abréviée pour assurer un espacement approprié de l&#039;information. Vous pouvez utiliser les contrôles au bas de l&#039;écran pour rechercher et organiser le contenu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;View single&#039;&#039;: one item at a time&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;View list&#039;&#039; (red arrow): several items at a time (number is user defined)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Add entry&#039;&#039; (green arrows): add an item to the database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The icons highlighted in yellow are for editing, viewing and deleting an item in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Dbasetabs.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== View single ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you may view only one entry at a time. This might allow you to view more detailed information than the list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add comment ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If comments have been enabled, you may add a comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate entries ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If ratings have been enabled, and made viewable, by the database editor, you may [[Grades|grade]] other database entries, and view these ratings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding an entry==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;Add entry&amp;quot; tab and fill in the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link in the Database activity administration block. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3451</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3451"/>
		<updated>2013-08-05T20:05:01Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* View list */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Affichage liste===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list view shows multiple entries, possibly in a more abbreviated form to ensure all the information fits. You may use the controls at the bottom of the screen to search and sort the contents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;View single&#039;&#039;: one item at a time&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;View list&#039;&#039; (red arrow): several items at a time (number is user defined)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Add entry&#039;&#039; (green arrows): add an item to the database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The icons highlighted in yellow are for editing, viewing and deleting an item in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Dbasetabs.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== View single ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you may view only one entry at a time. This might allow you to view more detailed information than the list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add comment ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If comments have been enabled, you may add a comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate entries ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If ratings have been enabled, and made viewable, by the database editor, you may [[Grades|grade]] other database entries, and view these ratings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding an entry==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;Add entry&amp;quot; tab and fill in the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link in the Database activity administration block. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3450</id>
		<title>Base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3450"/>
		<updated>2013-08-05T19:54:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
L&#039;activité base de données permet à l&#039;enseignant et/ou l&#039;étudiant de construire, afficher et faire une recherche dans une banque de fiches concernant tout sujet imaginable. Les types de format de ces fiches sont quasi-illimités ; avec images, fichiers, URL, caractères alphanumérique, etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Fichier:Exemple.jpg]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Activité base de données]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Construire une base de données]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Modèles]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Utiliser une base de données]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==&lt;br /&gt;
Tutoriels vidéos :&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://public.iutenligne.net/informatique/logiciels/moodle/formation-moodle/Chapitre-2/Sous-section-2-7-5.html Créer une base de données]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://public.iutenligne.net/informatique/logiciels/moodle/formation-moodle/general/index.html 100 tutoriels vidéos pour Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Catégorie:Activités]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Database activity module]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3449</id>
		<title>Utiliser une base de données</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Utiliser_une_base_de_donn%C3%A9es&amp;diff=3449"/>
		<updated>2013-08-05T19:49:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : Page créée avec « {{Base de données}} ==Affichages==  ===View list===  The list view shows multiple entries, possibly in a more abbreviated form to ensure all the information fits. You may... »&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Base de données}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Affichages==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===View list===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The list view shows multiple entries, possibly in a more abbreviated form to ensure all the information fits. You may use the controls at the bottom of the screen to search and sort the contents.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;View single&#039;&#039;: one item at a time&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;View list&#039;&#039; (red arrow): several items at a time (number is user defined)&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;Add entry&#039;&#039; (green arrows): add an item to the database&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The icons highlighted in yellow are for editing, viewing and deleting an item in the database.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Dbasetabs.gif]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== View single ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you may view only one entry at a time. This might allow you to view more detailed information than the list view.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Add comment ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If comments have been enabled, you may add a comment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Rate entries ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If ratings have been enabled, and made viewable, by the database editor, you may [[Grades|grade]] other database entries, and view these ratings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding an entry==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Go to the &amp;quot;Add entry&amp;quot; tab and fill in the form.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Automatically linking database entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the [[Database auto-linking filter]] is enabled, any entries in a database will be automatically linked to where the concept words and/or phrases appear within the same course. This includes forum postings, internal resources, week summaries etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you do not want particular text to be linked (in a forum posting, say) then you should add &amp;lt;nolink&amp;gt; and &amp;lt;/nolink&amp;gt; tags around the text. Alternatively the filter can be disabled for a particular activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing many entries==&lt;br /&gt;
You can import entries via a CSV file if you click the &amp;quot;Import entries&amp;quot; link in the Database activity administration block. CSV means Comma-Separated-Values and is a common format for text interchange.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:Databaseupload.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The easiest way to determine the format of the text file is to manually add an entry to the database and then export it. The resulting export text file may then be edited and used for importing entries. Here&#039;s a sample of what a very simple file will look like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Upload_csv_sample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The expected file format is a plain text file with a list of field names as the first record. The data then follows, one record per line.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The field delimiter defaults to a comma character and the field enclosure is not set by default (field enclosures are characters that surround each field in each record).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Records should be delimited by new lines (usually generated by pressing RETURN or ENTER in your text editor). Tabs can be specified using \t and newlines by \n.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Sample file:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
  name,height,weight&lt;br /&gt;
  Kai,180cm,80kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Kim,170cm,60kg&lt;br /&gt;
  Koo,190cm,20kg&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Certain field types may not be supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Do not put spaces after your commas or upload will fail!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
After upload page import.php comes back blank if it failed. &lt;br /&gt;
If successful you&#039;ll read a message like, &amp;quot;1 entries saved&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting entries==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can export entries either in CSV (comma separated values) or ODS (OpenOffice Calc) formats by clicking the tab at the top or by clicking the &amp;quot;Export entries&amp;quot; link in the Database Activity administration block. (Both CSV and ODS formats can be opened with MS Excel.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Databasexport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using the CSV format, the user can select either the comma, semicolon, or tab to separate the fields. The selection of the proper character is important. If users select to use a comma to separate the fields and some of the fields contain data with commas then the number of columns is going to be misaligned and likely cause confusion.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can select which fields from the database they wish to have exported. By default, all fields are checked to be included. Choose the fields that you wish to have included in the export.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Once the export type and the fields to be exported have been selected, clicking on the Export entries pushbutton will generate the file. The user will usually have the option of either opening or saving the file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For information on converting the date export (and import) format, see the discussion [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=220505 Standard Database Module - Dates].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Exporting to an external portfolio==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If an external [[Portfolios|portfolio]] such as [[Mahara_portfolio|Mahara]] has been enabled by the administrator then users have the option to export individual entries to that portfolio. They will see at the bottom of a database entry an &amp;quot;export&amp;quot; icon to click on and select the portfolio to export to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Exportdatabasentry.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Example databases ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle.org has two good examples of the database module in action:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=6140 Moodle Buzz], a database of the titles, authors and web links to news articles mentioning Moodle&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=26 Themes], a database with screenshots, download links and user comments about Moodle [[Themes|themes]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Creative uses ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You could use the database module to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* allow collaboration on building a collection of web links/books/journal references related to a particular subject&lt;br /&gt;
* display student created photos/posters/websites/poems for peer comment and review&lt;br /&gt;
* gather comments and votes on a shortlist of potential logos/mascot names/project ideas&lt;br /&gt;
* provide a [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=52699 student file storage area]&lt;br /&gt;
* maintain a log of what was done in a face-to-face class each day, so that absent students can get caught up themselves.  [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=115047 Example]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://school.demo.moodle.net/course/view.php?id=127&amp;amp;section=3 Examples of databases in the School demo site] (available for download)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Dataform module]], which is a major enhancement of the Database module with improved browsing, editing, searching and other features.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Glossary module]], which performs a similar though more specialised, text-based role&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Using Moodle book]] Chapter 12: Databases&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=3505 Database activity module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://treadwell.cce.cornell.edu/moodle_doc/database_moodle/index.html Screencast introducing the Database Module and walking through creating a database]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?rid=2424 Tracking Students&#039; Reading with the Moodle Database Module] presentation&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=72260 Database Module: Each learner Private DB?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84487 Database for Dummies please!]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=89117 Restricting access to database content by user?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=139137 How to use the database activity module?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank nutzen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3448</id>
		<title>Modèles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3448"/>
		<updated>2013-08-05T19:41:22Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Reset templates button */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
Les modèles pour le module [[Base de données]] permettent de contrôler le format visuel de l&#039;information lors de la visualisation des listes ou lors de l&#039;édition des données. C&#039;est la même technique du publipostage dans les logiciels tels que Open Office Writer et Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage des balises==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le contenu de chaque [[Champ]] que vous créez pour votre base de données et quelques balises spéciales (énumérées ci-dessous) peuvent être insérés dans des modèles.&lt;br /&gt;
Les champs ont des formats &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Toutes les autres balises ont le format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##balise##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser les balises dans la boîte du côté gauche, utilisez l&#039;éditeur HTML, placez votre curseur sur la zone de texte de votre cible et cliquez sur la balise de votre choix. Autrement, vous pouvez simplement taper le nom de la balise désirée comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##ceci##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ou comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[ceci]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##edit##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien avec icône permettant d&#039;éditer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##delete##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant de supprimer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##approve##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant d&#039;approuver la donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##more##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour l&#039;affichage fiche, pouvant contenir plus d&#039;informations&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée l&#039;URL du lien ci-dessus. Utile pour créer vos propres liens. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l&#039;icône du lien et taper &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dans un champ URL ou dans le type vue code source &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;##moreurl##&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##comments##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour visualiser/éditer des commentaires, le lien texte est le nombre de commentaires (disponible seulement si les commentaires sont activés)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##user##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour la page de l&#039;utilisateur qui entre la donnée&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timeadded##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timemodified##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle liste ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle permet le contrôle des champs utilisés et leur positionnement lorsqu&#039;on visionne plusieurs entrées à la fois (ex: résultats de recherche). Il est possible que cette vue fournisse simplement un aperçu avec plus d&#039;informations détaillés. En cliquant sur la fiche, on accède à la vue Affichage fiche.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle liste peut servir comme moyen d&#039;exporter votre base de donnée sous un fichier CSV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cette vue est utilisé pour montrer une fiche à la fois donnant plus d&#039;espace pour l&#039;affichage d&#039;information tel que les grandes images ou simplement plus de détails concernant une fiche lorsque l&#039;espace est requise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle recherche avancée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle de recherche avancée est pour créer une interface qui sera utilisée par le moteur de recherche avancée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle nouvelle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle crée une interface qui sera utilisé pour ajouter ou modifier des fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle RSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous laisse contrôler le contenu du flux RSS pour la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle CSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un de vos modèles HTML requiert [[CSS]] afin d&#039;afficher des styles particuliers, vous pouvez les spécifier ici.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle Javascript ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser javascript pour manipuler la manière dont les éléments seront affichés dans le mode liste, fiche ou nouvelle fiche. Vous devez joindre les parties que vous voulez manipuler dans un élément HTML. La nomenclature est essentielle étant donné qu&#039;elle vous permet d&#039;identifier les éléments à manipuler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, vous désirez qu&#039;un champ prenant le nom d&#039;un utilisateur compte le nombre de fois qu&#039;un nom corresponde à certains critères puis les affichent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Votre base de données contiendra un champ nommé &amp;quot;nom&amp;quot;. Dans votre modèle Liste, vous pourrez afficher le contenu de ce champ en utilisant le format &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nom]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; à l&#039;endroit où vous désirez afficher cet information. Par exemple, dans le &#039;&#039;Repeated entry&#039;&#039; sur le modèle Liste vous aurez:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous avez maintenant besoin de modifier cette entrée pour assurer que votre élément soit identifié afin de le manipuler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td name=&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le pied de page de votre affichage liste peut maintenant contenir un autre élément pour afficher le résultat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div name=&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Votre modèle JavaScript peut ressembler comme suit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 var cnt = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 var re = /foo|Foo/;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 function init(){&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedElements = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   for (i=0; i &amp;lt; namedElements.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
       if(re.test(namedElements[i].innerHTML)) cnt++;&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedResult = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   namedResult[0].innerHTML = cnt;&lt;br /&gt;
   }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 window.onload = init;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ceci affichera un tableau de noms comme dans l&#039;affichage liste. Or, le décompte de noms associés à foo ou Foo sera également dans le bas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Réinitialiser le modèle ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lorsqu&#039;une base de données est crée, les modèles seront pré-remplis avec un code HTML de base. Si plus tard vous décidez d&#039;ajouter des champs, vous devrez cliquer sur le bouton &#039;&#039;Réinitialiser le modèle&#039;&#039; pour que ceux-ci soient ajoutés au code HTML. Si vous modifiez n&#039;importe quel champ entre temps, vos changements seront perdus. Il est recommandé de finaliser les champs avant de modifier le code du modèle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=7026851446099005477 Video demonstrating tag usage]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussions sur les forums de &amp;quot;Using Moodle&amp;quot; (en anglais) :&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=55338 Look of the database module]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=74243 How can I list database information horizontally instead of vertically?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=61179 For those who want the display of Moodle Site&#039;s Modules and plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84050 Can&#039;t get columns to line up in list view]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=86927 Time stamp for database entries?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank-Vorlagen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:データベーステンプレート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3447</id>
		<title>Modèles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3447"/>
		<updated>2013-08-05T19:21:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Modèle Javascript */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
Les modèles pour le module [[Base de données]] permettent de contrôler le format visuel de l&#039;information lors de la visualisation des listes ou lors de l&#039;édition des données. C&#039;est la même technique du publipostage dans les logiciels tels que Open Office Writer et Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage des balises==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le contenu de chaque [[Champ]] que vous créez pour votre base de données et quelques balises spéciales (énumérées ci-dessous) peuvent être insérés dans des modèles.&lt;br /&gt;
Les champs ont des formats &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Toutes les autres balises ont le format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##balise##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser les balises dans la boîte du côté gauche, utilisez l&#039;éditeur HTML, placez votre curseur sur la zone de texte de votre cible et cliquez sur la balise de votre choix. Autrement, vous pouvez simplement taper le nom de la balise désirée comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##ceci##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ou comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[ceci]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##edit##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien avec icône permettant d&#039;éditer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##delete##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant de supprimer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##approve##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant d&#039;approuver la donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##more##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour l&#039;affichage fiche, pouvant contenir plus d&#039;informations&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée l&#039;URL du lien ci-dessus. Utile pour créer vos propres liens. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l&#039;icône du lien et taper &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dans un champ URL ou dans le type vue code source &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;##moreurl##&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##comments##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour visualiser/éditer des commentaires, le lien texte est le nombre de commentaires (disponible seulement si les commentaires sont activés)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##user##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour la page de l&#039;utilisateur qui entre la donnée&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timeadded##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timemodified##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle liste ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle permet le contrôle des champs utilisés et leur positionnement lorsqu&#039;on visionne plusieurs entrées à la fois (ex: résultats de recherche). Il est possible que cette vue fournisse simplement un aperçu avec plus d&#039;informations détaillés. En cliquant sur la fiche, on accède à la vue Affichage fiche.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle liste peut servir comme moyen d&#039;exporter votre base de donnée sous un fichier CSV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cette vue est utilisé pour montrer une fiche à la fois donnant plus d&#039;espace pour l&#039;affichage d&#039;information tel que les grandes images ou simplement plus de détails concernant une fiche lorsque l&#039;espace est requise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle recherche avancée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle de recherche avancée est pour créer une interface qui sera utilisée par le moteur de recherche avancée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle nouvelle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle crée une interface qui sera utilisé pour ajouter ou modifier des fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle RSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous laisse contrôler le contenu du flux RSS pour la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle CSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un de vos modèles HTML requiert [[CSS]] afin d&#039;afficher des styles particuliers, vous pouvez les spécifier ici.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle Javascript ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser javascript pour manipuler la manière dont les éléments seront affichés dans le mode liste, fiche ou nouvelle fiche. Vous devez joindre les parties que vous voulez manipuler dans un élément HTML. La nomenclature est essentielle étant donné qu&#039;elle vous permet d&#039;identifier les éléments à manipuler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, vous désirez qu&#039;un champ prenant le nom d&#039;un utilisateur compte le nombre de fois qu&#039;un nom corresponde à certains critères puis les affichent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Votre base de données contiendra un champ nommé &amp;quot;nom&amp;quot;. Dans votre modèle Liste, vous pourrez afficher le contenu de ce champ en utilisant le format &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nom]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; à l&#039;endroit où vous désirez afficher cet information. Par exemple, dans le &#039;&#039;Repeated entry&#039;&#039; sur le modèle Liste vous aurez:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous avez maintenant besoin de modifier cette entrée pour assurer que votre élément soit identifié afin de le manipuler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td name=&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le pied de page de votre affichage liste peut maintenant contenir un autre élément pour afficher le résultat.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div name=&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Votre modèle JavaScript peut ressembler comme suit&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 var cnt = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 var re = /foo|Foo/;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 function init(){&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedElements = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   for (i=0; i &amp;lt; namedElements.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
       if(re.test(namedElements[i].innerHTML)) cnt++;&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedResult = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   namedResult[0].innerHTML = cnt;&lt;br /&gt;
   }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 window.onload = init;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ceci affichera un tableau de noms comme dans l&#039;affichage liste. Or, le décompte de noms associés à foo ou Foo sera également dans le bas.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reset templates button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you first create a database the templates will be pre-filled with appropriate HTML. If you later add fields then you can press the &#039;&#039;reset templates&#039;&#039; button and it will add HTML for the new fields in a similar fashion. If you have edited any of the templates in the meantime then your changes will be lost. It is recommended that you finalize the database fields before changing the template code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=7026851446099005477 Video demonstrating tag usage]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussions sur les forums de &amp;quot;Using Moodle&amp;quot; (en anglais) :&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=55338 Look of the database module]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=74243 How can I list database information horizontally instead of vertically?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=61179 For those who want the display of Moodle Site&#039;s Modules and plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84050 Can&#039;t get columns to line up in list view]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=86927 Time stamp for database entries?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank-Vorlagen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:データベーステンプレート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3446</id>
		<title>Modèles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3446"/>
		<updated>2013-08-05T19:03:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Modèle Javascript */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
Les modèles pour le module [[Base de données]] permettent de contrôler le format visuel de l&#039;information lors de la visualisation des listes ou lors de l&#039;édition des données. C&#039;est la même technique du publipostage dans les logiciels tels que Open Office Writer et Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage des balises==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le contenu de chaque [[Champ]] que vous créez pour votre base de données et quelques balises spéciales (énumérées ci-dessous) peuvent être insérés dans des modèles.&lt;br /&gt;
Les champs ont des formats &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Toutes les autres balises ont le format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##balise##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser les balises dans la boîte du côté gauche, utilisez l&#039;éditeur HTML, placez votre curseur sur la zone de texte de votre cible et cliquez sur la balise de votre choix. Autrement, vous pouvez simplement taper le nom de la balise désirée comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##ceci##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ou comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[ceci]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##edit##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien avec icône permettant d&#039;éditer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##delete##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant de supprimer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##approve##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant d&#039;approuver la donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##more##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour l&#039;affichage fiche, pouvant contenir plus d&#039;informations&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée l&#039;URL du lien ci-dessus. Utile pour créer vos propres liens. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l&#039;icône du lien et taper &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dans un champ URL ou dans le type vue code source &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;##moreurl##&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##comments##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour visualiser/éditer des commentaires, le lien texte est le nombre de commentaires (disponible seulement si les commentaires sont activés)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##user##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour la page de l&#039;utilisateur qui entre la donnée&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timeadded##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timemodified##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle liste ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle permet le contrôle des champs utilisés et leur positionnement lorsqu&#039;on visionne plusieurs entrées à la fois (ex: résultats de recherche). Il est possible que cette vue fournisse simplement un aperçu avec plus d&#039;informations détaillés. En cliquant sur la fiche, on accède à la vue Affichage fiche.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle liste peut servir comme moyen d&#039;exporter votre base de donnée sous un fichier CSV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cette vue est utilisé pour montrer une fiche à la fois donnant plus d&#039;espace pour l&#039;affichage d&#039;information tel que les grandes images ou simplement plus de détails concernant une fiche lorsque l&#039;espace est requise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle recherche avancée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle de recherche avancée est pour créer une interface qui sera utilisée par le moteur de recherche avancée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle nouvelle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle crée une interface qui sera utilisé pour ajouter ou modifier des fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle RSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous laisse contrôler le contenu du flux RSS pour la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle CSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un de vos modèles HTML requiert [[CSS]] afin d&#039;afficher des styles particuliers, vous pouvez les spécifier ici.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle Javascript ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser javascript pour manipuler la manière dont les éléments seront affichés dans le mode liste, fiche ou nouvelle fiche. Vous devez joindre les parties que vous voulez manipuler dans un élément HTML. La nomenclature est essentielle étant donné qu&#039;elle vous permet d&#039;identifier les éléments à manipuler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, vous désirez qu&#039;un champ prenant le nom d&#039;un utilisateur compte le nombre de fois qu&#039;un nom corresponde à certains critères puis les affichent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Votre base de données contiendra un champ nommé &amp;quot;nom&amp;quot;. Dans votre modèle Liste, vous pourrez afficher le contenu de ce champ en utilisant le format &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nom]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; à l&#039;endroit où vous désirez afficher cet information. Par exemple, dans le &#039;&#039;Repeated entry&#039;&#039; sur le modèle Liste vous aurez:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous avez maintenant besoin de modifier You now need to modify that entry to ensure that the part you want to manipulate is a named element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td name=&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer of your list view can then contain another named element to display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div name=&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your javascript template can now look as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 var cnt = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 var re = /foo|Foo/;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 function init(){&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedElements = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   for (i=0; i &amp;lt; namedElements.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
       if(re.test(namedElements[i].innerHTML)) cnt++;&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedResult = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   namedResult[0].innerHTML = cnt;&lt;br /&gt;
   }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 window.onload = init;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will display a table of names as is usual in the list view. Now at the bottom there will also be the count of the names that matched foo or Foo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reset templates button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you first create a database the templates will be pre-filled with appropriate HTML. If you later add fields then you can press the &#039;&#039;reset templates&#039;&#039; button and it will add HTML for the new fields in a similar fashion. If you have edited any of the templates in the meantime then your changes will be lost. It is recommended that you finalize the database fields before changing the template code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=7026851446099005477 Video demonstrating tag usage]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussions sur les forums de &amp;quot;Using Moodle&amp;quot; (en anglais) :&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=55338 Look of the database module]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=74243 How can I list database information horizontally instead of vertically?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=61179 For those who want the display of Moodle Site&#039;s Modules and plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84050 Can&#039;t get columns to line up in list view]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=86927 Time stamp for database entries?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank-Vorlagen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:データベーステンプレート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3445</id>
		<title>Modèles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3445"/>
		<updated>2013-07-29T20:22:44Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Modèle Javascript */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
Les modèles pour le module [[Base de données]] permettent de contrôler le format visuel de l&#039;information lors de la visualisation des listes ou lors de l&#039;édition des données. C&#039;est la même technique du publipostage dans les logiciels tels que Open Office Writer et Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage des balises==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le contenu de chaque [[Champ]] que vous créez pour votre base de données et quelques balises spéciales (énumérées ci-dessous) peuvent être insérés dans des modèles.&lt;br /&gt;
Les champs ont des formats &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Toutes les autres balises ont le format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##balise##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser les balises dans la boîte du côté gauche, utilisez l&#039;éditeur HTML, placez votre curseur sur la zone de texte de votre cible et cliquez sur la balise de votre choix. Autrement, vous pouvez simplement taper le nom de la balise désirée comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##ceci##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ou comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[ceci]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##edit##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien avec icône permettant d&#039;éditer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##delete##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant de supprimer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##approve##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant d&#039;approuver la donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##more##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour l&#039;affichage fiche, pouvant contenir plus d&#039;informations&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée l&#039;URL du lien ci-dessus. Utile pour créer vos propres liens. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l&#039;icône du lien et taper &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dans un champ URL ou dans le type vue code source &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;##moreurl##&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##comments##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour visualiser/éditer des commentaires, le lien texte est le nombre de commentaires (disponible seulement si les commentaires sont activés)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##user##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour la page de l&#039;utilisateur qui entre la donnée&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timeadded##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timemodified##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle liste ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle permet le contrôle des champs utilisés et leur positionnement lorsqu&#039;on visionne plusieurs entrées à la fois (ex: résultats de recherche). Il est possible que cette vue fournisse simplement un aperçu avec plus d&#039;informations détaillés. En cliquant sur la fiche, on accède à la vue Affichage fiche.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle liste peut servir comme moyen d&#039;exporter votre base de donnée sous un fichier CSV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cette vue est utilisé pour montrer une fiche à la fois donnant plus d&#039;espace pour l&#039;affichage d&#039;information tel que les grandes images ou simplement plus de détails concernant une fiche lorsque l&#039;espace est requise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle recherche avancée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle de recherche avancée est pour créer une interface qui sera utilisée par le moteur de recherche avancée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle nouvelle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle crée une interface qui sera utilisé pour ajouter ou modifier des fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle RSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous laisse contrôler le contenu du flux RSS pour la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle CSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un de vos modèles HTML requiert [[CSS]] afin d&#039;afficher des styles particuliers, vous pouvez les spécifier ici.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle Javascript ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser javascript pour manipuler la manière dont les éléments seront affichés dans le mode liste, fiche ou nouvelle fiche. Vous devez joindre les parties que vous voulez manipuler dans un élément HTML. La nomenclature est essentielle étant donné qu&#039;elle vous permet d&#039;identifier les éléments à manipuler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, vous désirez qu&#039;un champ prenant le nom d&#039;un utilisateur compte le nombre de fois qu&#039;un nom corresponde à certains critères puis les affichent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Votre base de données contiendra un champ nommé &amp;quot;nom&amp;quot;. Dans votre modèle Liste, vous pourrez afficher le contenu de ce champ en utilisant le format &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nom]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; à l&#039;endroit où vous désirez afficher cet information. Par exemple, dans le &#039;&#039;Repeated entry&#039;&#039; sur le modèle Liste vous aurez:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You now need to modify that entry to ensure that the part you want to manipulate is a named element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td name=&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer of your list view can then contain another named element to display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div name=&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your javascript template can now look as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 var cnt = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 var re = /foo|Foo/;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 function init(){&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedElements = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   for (i=0; i &amp;lt; namedElements.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
       if(re.test(namedElements[i].innerHTML)) cnt++;&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedResult = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   namedResult[0].innerHTML = cnt;&lt;br /&gt;
   }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 window.onload = init;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will display a table of names as is usual in the list view. Now at the bottom there will also be the count of the names that matched foo or Foo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reset templates button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you first create a database the templates will be pre-filled with appropriate HTML. If you later add fields then you can press the &#039;&#039;reset templates&#039;&#039; button and it will add HTML for the new fields in a similar fashion. If you have edited any of the templates in the meantime then your changes will be lost. It is recommended that you finalize the database fields before changing the template code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=7026851446099005477 Video demonstrating tag usage]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussions sur les forums de &amp;quot;Using Moodle&amp;quot; (en anglais) :&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=55338 Look of the database module]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=74243 How can I list database information horizontally instead of vertically?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=61179 For those who want the display of Moodle Site&#039;s Modules and plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84050 Can&#039;t get columns to line up in list view]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=86927 Time stamp for database entries?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank-Vorlagen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:データベーステンプレート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3444</id>
		<title>Modèles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3444"/>
		<updated>2013-07-29T20:21:05Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Modèle Javascript */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
Les modèles pour le module [[Base de données]] permettent de contrôler le format visuel de l&#039;information lors de la visualisation des listes ou lors de l&#039;édition des données. C&#039;est la même technique du publipostage dans les logiciels tels que Open Office Writer et Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage des balises==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le contenu de chaque [[Champ]] que vous créez pour votre base de données et quelques balises spéciales (énumérées ci-dessous) peuvent être insérés dans des modèles.&lt;br /&gt;
Les champs ont des formats &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Toutes les autres balises ont le format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##balise##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser les balises dans la boîte du côté gauche, utilisez l&#039;éditeur HTML, placez votre curseur sur la zone de texte de votre cible et cliquez sur la balise de votre choix. Autrement, vous pouvez simplement taper le nom de la balise désirée comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##ceci##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ou comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[ceci]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##edit##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien avec icône permettant d&#039;éditer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##delete##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant de supprimer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##approve##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant d&#039;approuver la donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##more##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour l&#039;affichage fiche, pouvant contenir plus d&#039;informations&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée l&#039;URL du lien ci-dessus. Utile pour créer vos propres liens. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l&#039;icône du lien et taper &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dans un champ URL ou dans le type vue code source &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;##moreurl##&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##comments##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour visualiser/éditer des commentaires, le lien texte est le nombre de commentaires (disponible seulement si les commentaires sont activés)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##user##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour la page de l&#039;utilisateur qui entre la donnée&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timeadded##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timemodified##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle liste ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle permet le contrôle des champs utilisés et leur positionnement lorsqu&#039;on visionne plusieurs entrées à la fois (ex: résultats de recherche). Il est possible que cette vue fournisse simplement un aperçu avec plus d&#039;informations détaillés. En cliquant sur la fiche, on accède à la vue Affichage fiche.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle liste peut servir comme moyen d&#039;exporter votre base de donnée sous un fichier CSV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cette vue est utilisé pour montrer une fiche à la fois donnant plus d&#039;espace pour l&#039;affichage d&#039;information tel que les grandes images ou simplement plus de détails concernant une fiche lorsque l&#039;espace est requise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle recherche avancée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle de recherche avancée est pour créer une interface qui sera utilisée par le moteur de recherche avancée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle nouvelle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle crée une interface qui sera utilisé pour ajouter ou modifier des fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle RSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous laisse contrôler le contenu du flux RSS pour la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle CSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un de vos modèles HTML requiert [[CSS]] afin d&#039;afficher des styles particuliers, vous pouvez les spécifier ici.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle Javascript ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser javascript pour manipuler la manière dont les éléments seront affichés dans le mode liste, fiche ou nouvelle fiche. Vous devez joindre les parties que vous voulez manipuler dans un élément HTML. La nomenclature est essentielle étant donné qu&#039;elle vous permet d&#039;identifier les éléments à manipuler.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Par exemple, vous désirez qu&#039;un champ prenant le nom d&#039;un utilisateur compte le nombre de fois qu&#039;un nom corresponde à certains critères puis les affichent.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Votre base de données contiendra un champ nommé &amp;quot;nom&amp;quot;. Dans votre modèle Liste, vous pourrez afficher le contenu de ce champ en utilisant le format &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nom]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; à l&#039;endroit où vous désirez afficher cet information. Par exemple, dans le &#039;&#039;Repeated entry&#039;&#039; sur le modèle Liste vous aurez:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name: [[nom]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You now need to modify that entry to ensure that the part you want to manipulate is a named element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td name=&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer of your list view can then contain another named element to display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div name=&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your javascript template can now look as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 var cnt = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 var re = /foo|Foo/;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 function init(){&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedElements = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   for (i=0; i &amp;lt; namedElements.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
       if(re.test(namedElements[i].innerHTML)) cnt++;&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedResult = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   namedResult[0].innerHTML = cnt;&lt;br /&gt;
   }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 window.onload = init;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will display a table of names as is usual in the list view. Now at the bottom there will also be the count of the names that matched foo or Foo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reset templates button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you first create a database the templates will be pre-filled with appropriate HTML. If you later add fields then you can press the &#039;&#039;reset templates&#039;&#039; button and it will add HTML for the new fields in a similar fashion. If you have edited any of the templates in the meantime then your changes will be lost. It is recommended that you finalize the database fields before changing the template code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=7026851446099005477 Video demonstrating tag usage]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussions sur les forums de &amp;quot;Using Moodle&amp;quot; (en anglais) :&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=55338 Look of the database module]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=74243 How can I list database information horizontally instead of vertically?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=61179 For those who want the display of Moodle Site&#039;s Modules and plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84050 Can&#039;t get columns to line up in list view]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=86927 Time stamp for database entries?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank-Vorlagen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:データベーステンプレート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3443</id>
		<title>Modèles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3443"/>
		<updated>2013-07-29T20:02:13Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Javascript template */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
Les modèles pour le module [[Base de données]] permettent de contrôler le format visuel de l&#039;information lors de la visualisation des listes ou lors de l&#039;édition des données. C&#039;est la même technique du publipostage dans les logiciels tels que Open Office Writer et Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage des balises==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le contenu de chaque [[Champ]] que vous créez pour votre base de données et quelques balises spéciales (énumérées ci-dessous) peuvent être insérés dans des modèles.&lt;br /&gt;
Les champs ont des formats &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Toutes les autres balises ont le format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##balise##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser les balises dans la boîte du côté gauche, utilisez l&#039;éditeur HTML, placez votre curseur sur la zone de texte de votre cible et cliquez sur la balise de votre choix. Autrement, vous pouvez simplement taper le nom de la balise désirée comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##ceci##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ou comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[ceci]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##edit##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien avec icône permettant d&#039;éditer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##delete##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant de supprimer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##approve##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant d&#039;approuver la donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##more##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour l&#039;affichage fiche, pouvant contenir plus d&#039;informations&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée l&#039;URL du lien ci-dessus. Utile pour créer vos propres liens. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l&#039;icône du lien et taper &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dans un champ URL ou dans le type vue code source &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;##moreurl##&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##comments##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour visualiser/éditer des commentaires, le lien texte est le nombre de commentaires (disponible seulement si les commentaires sont activés)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##user##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour la page de l&#039;utilisateur qui entre la donnée&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timeadded##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timemodified##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle liste ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle permet le contrôle des champs utilisés et leur positionnement lorsqu&#039;on visionne plusieurs entrées à la fois (ex: résultats de recherche). Il est possible que cette vue fournisse simplement un aperçu avec plus d&#039;informations détaillés. En cliquant sur la fiche, on accède à la vue Affichage fiche.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle liste peut servir comme moyen d&#039;exporter votre base de donnée sous un fichier CSV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cette vue est utilisé pour montrer une fiche à la fois donnant plus d&#039;espace pour l&#039;affichage d&#039;information tel que les grandes images ou simplement plus de détails concernant une fiche lorsque l&#039;espace est requise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle recherche avancée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle de recherche avancée est pour créer une interface qui sera utilisée par le moteur de recherche avancée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle nouvelle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle crée une interface qui sera utilisé pour ajouter ou modifier des fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle RSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous laisse contrôler le contenu du flux RSS pour la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle CSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un de vos modèles HTML requiert [[CSS]] afin d&#039;afficher des styles particuliers, vous pouvez les spécifier ici.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle Javascript ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous pouvez utiliser javascript pour manipuler la manière dont les éléments seront affichés dans le mode liste, fiche ou nouvelle fiche. Basically you need to enclose the part you want to manipulate in some named html element. The naming is essential as it allows you to identify the element for manipulation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s say, for example, you have a field in your database that stores a person&#039;s name and when you display the names in the List View you want to count the times a name matches some criteria and display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your database will contain a field which we will call &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;. In your List template you will be able to display the contents of that field by using the &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[name]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; construct at the place where you want that information displayed. For example in the &#039;&#039;Repeated entry&#039;&#039; on the list template you will have&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You now need to modify that entry to ensure that the part you want to manipulate is a named element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td name=&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer of your list view can then contain another named element to display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div name=&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your javascript template can now look as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 var cnt = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 var re = /foo|Foo/;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 function init(){&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedElements = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   for (i=0; i &amp;lt; namedElements.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
       if(re.test(namedElements[i].innerHTML)) cnt++;&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedResult = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   namedResult[0].innerHTML = cnt;&lt;br /&gt;
   }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 window.onload = init;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will display a table of names as is usual in the list view. Now at the bottom there will also be the count of the names that matched foo or Foo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reset templates button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you first create a database the templates will be pre-filled with appropriate HTML. If you later add fields then you can press the &#039;&#039;reset templates&#039;&#039; button and it will add HTML for the new fields in a similar fashion. If you have edited any of the templates in the meantime then your changes will be lost. It is recommended that you finalize the database fields before changing the template code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=7026851446099005477 Video demonstrating tag usage]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussions sur les forums de &amp;quot;Using Moodle&amp;quot; (en anglais) :&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=55338 Look of the database module]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=74243 How can I list database information horizontally instead of vertically?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=61179 For those who want the display of Moodle Site&#039;s Modules and plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84050 Can&#039;t get columns to line up in list view]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=86927 Time stamp for database entries?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank-Vorlagen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:データベーステンプレート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3442</id>
		<title>Modèles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3442"/>
		<updated>2013-07-29T19:53:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* CSS template */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
Les modèles pour le module [[Base de données]] permettent de contrôler le format visuel de l&#039;information lors de la visualisation des listes ou lors de l&#039;édition des données. C&#039;est la même technique du publipostage dans les logiciels tels que Open Office Writer et Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage des balises==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le contenu de chaque [[Champ]] que vous créez pour votre base de données et quelques balises spéciales (énumérées ci-dessous) peuvent être insérés dans des modèles.&lt;br /&gt;
Les champs ont des formats &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Toutes les autres balises ont le format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##balise##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser les balises dans la boîte du côté gauche, utilisez l&#039;éditeur HTML, placez votre curseur sur la zone de texte de votre cible et cliquez sur la balise de votre choix. Autrement, vous pouvez simplement taper le nom de la balise désirée comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##ceci##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ou comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[ceci]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##edit##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien avec icône permettant d&#039;éditer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##delete##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant de supprimer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##approve##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant d&#039;approuver la donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##more##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour l&#039;affichage fiche, pouvant contenir plus d&#039;informations&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée l&#039;URL du lien ci-dessus. Utile pour créer vos propres liens. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l&#039;icône du lien et taper &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dans un champ URL ou dans le type vue code source &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;##moreurl##&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##comments##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour visualiser/éditer des commentaires, le lien texte est le nombre de commentaires (disponible seulement si les commentaires sont activés)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##user##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour la page de l&#039;utilisateur qui entre la donnée&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timeadded##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timemodified##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle liste ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle permet le contrôle des champs utilisés et leur positionnement lorsqu&#039;on visionne plusieurs entrées à la fois (ex: résultats de recherche). Il est possible que cette vue fournisse simplement un aperçu avec plus d&#039;informations détaillés. En cliquant sur la fiche, on accède à la vue Affichage fiche.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle liste peut servir comme moyen d&#039;exporter votre base de donnée sous un fichier CSV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cette vue est utilisé pour montrer une fiche à la fois donnant plus d&#039;espace pour l&#039;affichage d&#039;information tel que les grandes images ou simplement plus de détails concernant une fiche lorsque l&#039;espace est requise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle recherche avancée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle de recherche avancée est pour créer une interface qui sera utilisée par le moteur de recherche avancée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle nouvelle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle crée une interface qui sera utilisé pour ajouter ou modifier des fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle RSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous laisse contrôler le contenu du flux RSS pour la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle CSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Si un de vos modèles HTML requiert [[CSS]] afin d&#039;afficher des styles particuliers, vous pouvez les spécifier ici.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Javascript template ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use javascript to manipulate the way elements are displayed in either the List, Single or Add templates. Basically you need to enclose the part you want to manipulate in some named html element. The naming is essential as it allows you to identify the element for manipulation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s say, for example, you have a field in your database that stores a person&#039;s name and when you display the names in the List View you want to count the times a name matches some criteria and display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your database will contain a field which we will call &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;. In your List template you will be able to display the contents of that field by using the &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[name]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; construct at the place where you want that information displayed. For example in the &#039;&#039;Repeated entry&#039;&#039; on the list template you will have&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You now need to modify that entry to ensure that the part you want to manipulate is a named element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td name=&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer of your list view can then contain another named element to display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div name=&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your javascript template can now look as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 var cnt = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 var re = /foo|Foo/;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 function init(){&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedElements = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   for (i=0; i &amp;lt; namedElements.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
       if(re.test(namedElements[i].innerHTML)) cnt++;&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedResult = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   namedResult[0].innerHTML = cnt;&lt;br /&gt;
   }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 window.onload = init;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will display a table of names as is usual in the list view. Now at the bottom there will also be the count of the names that matched foo or Foo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reset templates button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you first create a database the templates will be pre-filled with appropriate HTML. If you later add fields then you can press the &#039;&#039;reset templates&#039;&#039; button and it will add HTML for the new fields in a similar fashion. If you have edited any of the templates in the meantime then your changes will be lost. It is recommended that you finalize the database fields before changing the template code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=7026851446099005477 Video demonstrating tag usage]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussions sur les forums de &amp;quot;Using Moodle&amp;quot; (en anglais) :&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=55338 Look of the database module]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=74243 How can I list database information horizontally instead of vertically?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=61179 For those who want the display of Moodle Site&#039;s Modules and plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84050 Can&#039;t get columns to line up in list view]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=86927 Time stamp for database entries?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank-Vorlagen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:データベーステンプレート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3441</id>
		<title>Modèles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3441"/>
		<updated>2013-07-29T19:50:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* Modèle RSS */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
Les modèles pour le module [[Base de données]] permettent de contrôler le format visuel de l&#039;information lors de la visualisation des listes ou lors de l&#039;édition des données. C&#039;est la même technique du publipostage dans les logiciels tels que Open Office Writer et Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage des balises==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le contenu de chaque [[Champ]] que vous créez pour votre base de données et quelques balises spéciales (énumérées ci-dessous) peuvent être insérés dans des modèles.&lt;br /&gt;
Les champs ont des formats &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Toutes les autres balises ont le format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##balise##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser les balises dans la boîte du côté gauche, utilisez l&#039;éditeur HTML, placez votre curseur sur la zone de texte de votre cible et cliquez sur la balise de votre choix. Autrement, vous pouvez simplement taper le nom de la balise désirée comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##ceci##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ou comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[ceci]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##edit##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien avec icône permettant d&#039;éditer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##delete##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant de supprimer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##approve##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant d&#039;approuver la donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##more##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour l&#039;affichage fiche, pouvant contenir plus d&#039;informations&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée l&#039;URL du lien ci-dessus. Utile pour créer vos propres liens. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l&#039;icône du lien et taper &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dans un champ URL ou dans le type vue code source &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;##moreurl##&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##comments##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour visualiser/éditer des commentaires, le lien texte est le nombre de commentaires (disponible seulement si les commentaires sont activés)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##user##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour la page de l&#039;utilisateur qui entre la donnée&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timeadded##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timemodified##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle liste ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle permet le contrôle des champs utilisés et leur positionnement lorsqu&#039;on visionne plusieurs entrées à la fois (ex: résultats de recherche). Il est possible que cette vue fournisse simplement un aperçu avec plus d&#039;informations détaillés. En cliquant sur la fiche, on accède à la vue Affichage fiche.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle liste peut servir comme moyen d&#039;exporter votre base de donnée sous un fichier CSV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cette vue est utilisé pour montrer une fiche à la fois donnant plus d&#039;espace pour l&#039;affichage d&#039;information tel que les grandes images ou simplement plus de détails concernant une fiche lorsque l&#039;espace est requise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle recherche avancée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle de recherche avancée est pour créer une interface qui sera utilisée par le moteur de recherche avancée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle nouvelle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle crée une interface qui sera utilisé pour ajouter ou modifier des fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle RSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous laisse contrôler le contenu du flux RSS pour la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CSS template ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any of the [[HTML in Moodle|HTML]] in your other templates requires [[CSS]] to provide visual style you can specify it here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Javascript template ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use javascript to manipulate the way elements are displayed in either the List, Single or Add templates. Basically you need to enclose the part you want to manipulate in some named html element. The naming is essential as it allows you to identify the element for manipulation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s say, for example, you have a field in your database that stores a person&#039;s name and when you display the names in the List View you want to count the times a name matches some criteria and display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your database will contain a field which we will call &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;. In your List template you will be able to display the contents of that field by using the &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[name]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; construct at the place where you want that information displayed. For example in the &#039;&#039;Repeated entry&#039;&#039; on the list template you will have&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You now need to modify that entry to ensure that the part you want to manipulate is a named element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td name=&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer of your list view can then contain another named element to display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div name=&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your javascript template can now look as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 var cnt = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 var re = /foo|Foo/;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 function init(){&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedElements = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   for (i=0; i &amp;lt; namedElements.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
       if(re.test(namedElements[i].innerHTML)) cnt++;&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedResult = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   namedResult[0].innerHTML = cnt;&lt;br /&gt;
   }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 window.onload = init;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will display a table of names as is usual in the list view. Now at the bottom there will also be the count of the names that matched foo or Foo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reset templates button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you first create a database the templates will be pre-filled with appropriate HTML. If you later add fields then you can press the &#039;&#039;reset templates&#039;&#039; button and it will add HTML for the new fields in a similar fashion. If you have edited any of the templates in the meantime then your changes will be lost. It is recommended that you finalize the database fields before changing the template code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=7026851446099005477 Video demonstrating tag usage]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussions sur les forums de &amp;quot;Using Moodle&amp;quot; (en anglais) :&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=55338 Look of the database module]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=74243 How can I list database information horizontally instead of vertically?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=61179 For those who want the display of Moodle Site&#039;s Modules and plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84050 Can&#039;t get columns to line up in list view]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=86927 Time stamp for database entries?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank-Vorlagen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:データベーステンプレート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3440</id>
		<title>Modèles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/2x/fr/index.php?title=Mod%C3%A8les&amp;diff=3440"/>
		<updated>2013-07-29T19:49:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Melrom : /* RSS template */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Activités}}&lt;br /&gt;
Les modèles pour le module [[Base de données]] permettent de contrôler le format visuel de l&#039;information lors de la visualisation des listes ou lors de l&#039;édition des données. C&#039;est la même technique du publipostage dans les logiciels tels que Open Office Writer et Microsoft Word.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Usage des balises==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le contenu de chaque [[Champ]] que vous créez pour votre base de données et quelques balises spéciales (énumérées ci-dessous) peuvent être insérés dans des modèles.&lt;br /&gt;
Les champs ont des formats &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;. Toutes les autres balises ont le format &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##balise##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Pour utiliser les balises dans la boîte du côté gauche, utilisez l&#039;éditeur HTML, placez votre curseur sur la zone de texte de votre cible et cliquez sur la balise de votre choix. Autrement, vous pouvez simplement taper le nom de la balise désirée comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##ceci##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; ou comme &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;&amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[ceci]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##edit##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien avec icône permettant d&#039;éditer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises) &lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##delete##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant de supprimer votre donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##approve##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien permettant d&#039;approuver la donnée (disponible seulement si vous avez les permissions requises)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##more##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour l&#039;affichage fiche, pouvant contenir plus d&#039;informations&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée l&#039;URL du lien ci-dessus. Utile pour créer vos propres liens. Vous pouvez cliquer sur l&#039;icône du lien et taper &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##moreurl##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; dans un champ URL ou dans le type vue code source &amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&amp;lt;a href=&amp;quot;##moreurl##&amp;quot;&amp;gt;[[nomduchamp]]&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##comments##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour visualiser/éditer des commentaires, le lien texte est le nombre de commentaires (disponible seulement si les commentaires sont activés)&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##user##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt; crée un lien pour la page de l&#039;utilisateur qui entre la donnée&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timeadded##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
* &amp;lt;code&amp;gt;##timemodified##&amp;lt;/code&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle liste ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle permet le contrôle des champs utilisés et leur positionnement lorsqu&#039;on visionne plusieurs entrées à la fois (ex: résultats de recherche). Il est possible que cette vue fournisse simplement un aperçu avec plus d&#039;informations détaillés. En cliquant sur la fiche, on accède à la vue Affichage fiche.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle liste peut servir comme moyen d&#039;exporter votre base de donnée sous un fichier CSV.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
Cette vue est utilisé pour montrer une fiche à la fois donnant plus d&#039;espace pour l&#039;affichage d&#039;information tel que les grandes images ou simplement plus de détails concernant une fiche lorsque l&#039;espace est requise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle recherche avancée ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Le modèle de recherche avancée est pour créer une interface qui sera utilisée par le moteur de recherche avancée.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle nouvelle fiche ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Ce modèle crée une interface qui sera utilisé pour ajouter ou modifier des fiches.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Modèle RSS ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Vous laisse contrôler le contenu du flux [[RSS]] pour la base de données.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== CSS template ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If any of the [[HTML in Moodle|HTML]] in your other templates requires [[CSS]] to provide visual style you can specify it here.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Javascript template ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can use javascript to manipulate the way elements are displayed in either the List, Single or Add templates. Basically you need to enclose the part you want to manipulate in some named html element. The naming is essential as it allows you to identify the element for manipulation. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Let&#039;s say, for example, you have a field in your database that stores a person&#039;s name and when you display the names in the List View you want to count the times a name matches some criteria and display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your database will contain a field which we will call &amp;quot;name&amp;quot;. In your List template you will be able to display the contents of that field by using the &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;[[name]]&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt; construct at the place where you want that information displayed. For example in the &#039;&#039;Repeated entry&#039;&#039; on the list template you will have&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You now need to modify that entry to ensure that the part you want to manipulate is a named element.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
     &amp;lt;td name=&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;&amp;gt;Name: [[name]]&amp;lt;/td&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
   &amp;lt;/tr&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;table&amp;gt;  &lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The footer of your list view can then contain another named element to display the result.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
  &amp;lt;div name=&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your javascript template can now look as follows&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 var cnt = 0;&lt;br /&gt;
 var re = /foo|Foo/;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 function init(){&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedElements = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;named&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   for (i=0; i &amp;lt; namedElements.length; i++) {&lt;br /&gt;
       if(re.test(namedElements[i].innerHTML)) cnt++;&lt;br /&gt;
     }&lt;br /&gt;
   var namedResult = document.getElementsByName(&amp;quot;result&amp;quot;);&lt;br /&gt;
   namedResult[0].innerHTML = cnt;&lt;br /&gt;
   }&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
 window.onload = init;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will display a table of names as is usual in the list view. Now at the bottom there will also be the count of the names that matched foo or Foo.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Reset templates button ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When you first create a database the templates will be pre-filled with appropriate HTML. If you later add fields then you can press the &#039;&#039;reset templates&#039;&#039; button and it will add HTML for the new fields in a similar fashion. If you have edited any of the templates in the meantime then your changes will be lost. It is recommended that you finalize the database fields before changing the template code.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Voir aussi ==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://video.google.com/videoplay?docid=7026851446099005477 Video demonstrating tag usage]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Discussions sur les forums de &amp;quot;Using Moodle&amp;quot; (en anglais) :&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=55338 Look of the database module]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=74243 How can I list database information horizontally instead of vertically?]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=61179 For those who want the display of Moodle Site&#039;s Modules and plugins]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=84050 Can&#039;t get columns to line up in list view]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=86927 Time stamp for database entries?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[en:Database templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Datenbank-Vorlagen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:データベーステンプレート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Melrom</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>